]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Fix Fission (broken by my previous patch)
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
2571583a 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
144@ifset M68HC11
145* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
147@ifset HPPA
148* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
833794fc
MR
153@ifset MIPS
154* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
162@ifset S/390
163* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
165@ifset SPU
166* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
168@ifset TICOFF
169* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
171@ifset WIN32
172* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
174@ifset XTENSA
175* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176@end ifset
252b5132
RH
177@end ifclear
178@ifclear SingleFormat
179* BFD:: BFD
180@end ifclear
181@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 185* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 186* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 187@end menu
84ec0e6d 188@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
189
190@node Overview
191@chapter Overview
192
193@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 195
0879a67a 196@ifset man
0285c67d 197@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 198ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
199@c man end
200
201@c man begin SEEALSO
202ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204@file{ld}.
205@c man end
206@end ifset
207
208@c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 211their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 212compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 213
ff5dcc92 214@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
215a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
0285c67d
NC
218@ifset man
219@c For the man only
ece2d90e 220This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
221@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
223@end ifset
224
252b5132 225@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
226This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
228write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231@end ifclear
232
233Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 236@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
237(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man end
240
252b5132
RH
241@node Invocation
242@chapter Invocation
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
ff5dcc92 246The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
247and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
0285c67d
NC
250@c man end
251
252b5132
RH
252@ifset UsesEnvVars
253@menu
254* Options:: Command Line Options
255* Environment:: Environment Variables
256@end menu
257
258@node Options
259@section Command Line Options
260@end ifset
261
262@cindex command line
263@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
264
265@c man begin OPTIONS
266
252b5132
RH
267The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 270For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
271object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274@smallexample
275ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276@end smallexample
277
ff5dcc92 278This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
279result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
ff5dcc92 283Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
284point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
289occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291noted in the descriptions below.
292
293@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
294Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
298
299Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303message @samp{No input files}.
304
36f63dca 305If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
306assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
311@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
316
317For options whose names are a single letter,
318option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320option that requires them.
321
322For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 323precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 324@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 325this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 326only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
327@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329output.
330
331Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336accepted.
252b5132 337
36f63dca
NC
338Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
340prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
342
343@smallexample
2509a395 344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
345@end smallexample
346
347This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
348silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355@smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
358
359Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360linker:
361
ff5dcc92 362@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 363@include at-file.texi
dff70155 364
2509a395
SL
365@kindex -a @var{keyword}
366@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
367This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
7ee314fa
AM
373@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 380it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 381This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 382interface.
7ee314fa 383
252b5132
RH
384@ifset I960
385@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
386@kindex -A @var{arch}
387@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
388@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
390In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
392@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 394archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
395family}, for details.
396
ff5dcc92 397Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
398other architecture families.
399@end ifset
400
401@ifclear SingleFormat
402@cindex binary input format
403@kindex -b @var{format}
404@kindex --format=@var{format}
405@cindex input format
406@cindex input format
407@item -b @var{input-format}
408@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
409@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 411@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 412that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 413configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 414to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
415default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419@xref{BFD}.
420
421You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423linking object files of different formats), by including
424@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 425particular format.
252b5132
RH
426
427The default format is taken from the environment variable
428@code{GNUTARGET}.
429@ifset UsesEnvVars
430@xref{Environment}.
431@end ifset
432You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
433@code{TARGET};
434@ifclear man
435see @ref{Format Commands}.
436@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
437@end ifclear
438
439@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441@cindex compatibility, MRI
442@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 444For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 445files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
446@ifclear man
447@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448@end ifclear
449@ifset man
450the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451@end ifset
452Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 453the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
454scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
456specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458@cindex common allocation
459@kindex -d
460@kindex -dc
461@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 462@item -d
252b5132
RH
463@itemx -dc
464@itemx -dp
465These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
7ee314fa
AM
471@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 480The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex entry point, from command line
483@kindex -e @var{entry}
484@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 485@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
486@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
b58f81ae
DJ
495@kindex --exclude-libs
496@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 498exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
499@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504be treated as hidden.
505
e1c37eb5
DK
506@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517regardless of this option.
518
252b5132
RH
519@cindex dynamic symbol table
520@kindex -E
521@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 522@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
523@item -E
524@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
525@itemx --no-export-dynamic
526When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
535
536If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539linking the program itself.
540
55255dae 541You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 542be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 543See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 544
8b747e1a
DK
545Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
36f63dca 549@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
550@cindex big-endian objects
551@cindex endianness
552@kindex -EB
553@item -EB
554Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556@cindex little-endian objects
557@kindex -EL
558@item -EL
559Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 560@end ifclear
252b5132 561
2509a395
SL
562@kindex -f @var{name}
563@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564@item -f @var{name}
565@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
566When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579machine specific performance.
580
581This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
2509a395
SL
584@kindex -F @var{name}
585@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 586@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 587@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
588When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599@var{name}.
600
ff5dcc92 601Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 602toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
603object files.
604@ifclear SingleFormat
605The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 606@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 607@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
608environment variable.
609@end ifclear
610The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 612
3dbf70a2 613@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
614@kindex -fini=@var{name}
615@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
616When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619the function to call.
620
252b5132
RH
621@kindex -g
622@item -g
623Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
2509a395
SL
625@kindex -G @var{value}
626@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 627@cindex object size
2509a395 628@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 632MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
633sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 636@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 637@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 638@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
639@itemx -soname=@var{name}
640When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646@kindex -i
647@cindex incremental link
648@item -i
649Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
3dbf70a2 651@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
652@kindex -init=@var{name}
653@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
654When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657function to call.
658
252b5132 659@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 660@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 661@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 662@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
663@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 667will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 668will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 669
ff5dcc92 670On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
671files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
678
679The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
ff5dcc92 686See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
687archives multiple times.
688
689You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691@ifset GENERIC
692This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 693if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
694behaviour of the AIX linker.
695@end ifset
696
697@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 698@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 699@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 700@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 701@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
702Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
704option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 707@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
708order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710option is specified.
252b5132 711
3aa2d05a
NC
712If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 715
252b5132
RH
716@ifset UsesEnvVars
717The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 718@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
719some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720@end ifset
721
722The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726@cindex emulation
727@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 728@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
729Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736configured.
737
738@cindex link map
739@kindex -M
740@kindex --print-map
741@item -M
742@itemx --print-map
743Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744information about the link, including the following:
745
746@itemize @bullet
747@item
3b83e13a 748Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
749@item
750How common symbols are allocated.
751@item
752All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
754@item
755The values assigned to symbols.
756
757Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763linker script containing:
764
765@smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769@end smallexample
770
771will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772option is used:
773
774@smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778@end smallexample
779
780See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781scripts.
252b5132
RH
782@end itemize
783
784@kindex -n
785@cindex read-only text
786@cindex NMAGIC
787@kindex --nmagic
788@item -n
789@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
790Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -N
795@kindex --omagic
796@cindex read/write from cmd line
797@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 798@item -N
252b5132
RH
799@itemx --omagic
800Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
801not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
803mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
806
807@kindex --no-omagic
808@cindex OMAGIC
809@item --no-omagic
810This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
814
815@kindex -o @var{output}
816@kindex --output=@var{output}
817@cindex naming the output file
818@item -o @var{output}
819@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 820Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
821option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824@kindex -O @var{level}
825@cindex generating optimized output
826@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 827If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 828the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
829should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 834
387dd777
DP
835@kindex -plugin @var{name}
836@item -plugin @var{name}
837Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841wish.
842
843Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849just copy in the newest one.
850
26278bb8
UD
851@kindex --push-state
852@cindex push state governing input file handling
853@item --push-state
854The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868something as follows:
869
870@smallexample
871-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872@end smallexample
873
874@kindex --pop-state
875@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 876@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
877Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878flags governing input file handling.
879
a712da20
NC
880@kindex -q
881@kindex --emit-relocs
882@cindex retain relocations in final executable
883@item -q
884@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 885Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
886Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888in larger executables.
889
dbab7a7b
NC
890This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
4f471f39
RS
892@kindex --force-dynamic
893@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894@item --force-dynamic
895Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896to VxWorks targets.
897
252b5132
RH
898@cindex partial link
899@cindex relocatable output
900@kindex -r
1049f94e 901@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 902@item -r
1049f94e 903@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 904Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 905turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
906linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 909@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
910If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
62bf86b4
HPN
914When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918with input files in other formats at all.
919
252b5132
RH
920This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922@kindex -R @var{file}
923@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924@cindex symbol-only input
925@item -R @var{filename}
926@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
ff5dcc92 932For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 933followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 934the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -s
937@kindex --strip-all
938@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 939@item -s
252b5132
RH
940@itemx --strip-all
941Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943@kindex -S
944@kindex --strip-debug
945@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 946@item -S
252b5132
RH
947@itemx --strip-debug
948Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
a70f34c0
NC
950@kindex --strip-discarded
951@kindex --no-strip-discarded
952@item --strip-discarded
953@itemx --no-strip-discarded
954Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955Enabled by default.
956
252b5132
RH
957@kindex -t
958@kindex --trace
959@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 960@item -t
252b5132 961@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 962Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
963
964@kindex -T @var{script}
965@kindex --script=@var{script}
966@cindex script files
967@item -T @var{scriptfile}
968@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 970@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 971@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
972output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975options accumulate.
252b5132 976
14be8564
L
977@kindex -dT @var{script}
978@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979@cindex script files
980@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991@samp{gcc}).
992
252b5132
RH
993@kindex -u @var{symbol}
994@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995@cindex undefined symbol
996@item -u @var{symbol}
997@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
0a618243
AB
1004If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007instead.
1008
1009@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex symbols, require defined
1011@cindex defined symbol
1012@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
252b5132
RH
1020@kindex -Ur
1021@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1022@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1023For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1025turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1026@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030@samp{-r} for the others.
1031
c005eb9e
AB
1032@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033@cindex orphan sections
1034@cindex sections, orphan
1035@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041@table @code
1042@item place
1043Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1045@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1046
1047@item discard
1048All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051@item warn
1052The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053issue a warning.
1054
1055@item error
1056The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057@end table
1058
1059The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
577a0623
AM
1061@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1070
252b5132
RH
1071@kindex -v
1072@kindex -V
1073@kindex --version
1074@cindex version
1075@item -v
1076@itemx --version
1077@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1078Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1079lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081@kindex -x
1082@kindex --discard-all
1083@cindex deleting local symbols
1084@item -x
1085@itemx --discard-all
1086Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088@kindex -X
1089@kindex --discard-locals
1090@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1091@item -X
252b5132 1092@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1093Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1096
1097@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099@cindex symbol tracing
1100@item -y @var{symbol}
1101@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109@kindex -Y @var{path}
1110@item -Y @var{path}
1111Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1116The recognized keywords are:
1117@table @samp
1118
1119@item combreloc
1120Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1121lookup caching possible.
1122
b8871f35
L
1123@item common
1124Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1125link.
1126
cd6d6c15 1127@item defs
560e09e9 1128Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1129shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1130
6aa29e7b
JJ
1131@item execstack
1132Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1133
b039ef04
L
1134@item global
1135This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1136the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1137of subsequently loaded libraries.
1138
cd6d6c15
NC
1139@item initfirst
1140This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1141It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1142before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1143the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1144the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1145objects.
1146
1147@item interpose
1148Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1149but the primary executable.
1150
5fa222e4
AM
1151@item lazy
1152When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1153dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1154the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1155Lazy binding is the default.
1156
cd6d6c15
NC
1157@item loadfltr
1158Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1159runtime.
1160
1161@item muldefs
1162Allows multiple definitions.
1163
1164@item nocombreloc
1165Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1166
b8871f35
L
1167@item nocommon
1168Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1169link.
1170
cd6d6c15 1171@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1172Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1173defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1174
1175@item nodefaultlib
1176Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1177ignore any default library search paths.
1178
1179@item nodelete
1180Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1181
1182@item nodlopen
1183Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1184
1185@item nodump
1186Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1187
6aa29e7b
JJ
1188@item noexecstack
1189Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1190
8dfef1bd
L
1191@item text
1192Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1193
1194@item notext
1195Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1196
1197@item textoff
1198Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1199
6aa29e7b
JJ
1200@item norelro
1201Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1202
cd6d6c15
NC
1203@item now
1204When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1205dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1206when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1207deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1208first called.
1209
1210@item origin
1211Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1212
6aa29e7b
JJ
1213@item relro
1214Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1215
24718e3b
L
1216@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1217Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1218
1219@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1220Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1221
04c3a755
NS
1222@item stack-size=@var{value}
1223Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1224Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1225@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1226
d258b828
IZ
1227@item bndplt
1228Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1229
889c2a67
L
1230@item noextern-protected-data
1231Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1232library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1233to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1234generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1235module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1236i386 and x86-64.
1237
954b63d4
AM
1238@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1239Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1240if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1241by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1242option.
1243
aec6b87e 1244@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1245Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1246object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1247@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1248are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1249make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1250
4c10bbaa
L
1251@item noreloc-overflow
1252Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1253relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1254overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1255
caa65211 1256@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1257@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1258@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1259@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1260Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1261to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1262@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1263@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1264@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1265@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1266Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1267
ee2fdd6f
L
1268@item ibtplt
1269Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1270Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1271
1272@item IBT
1273Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1274to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1275Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1276
48580982
L
1277@item shstk
1278Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1279to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1280Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1281
cd6d6c15
NC
1282@end table
1283
ece2d90e 1284Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1285
1286@kindex -(
1287@cindex groups of archives
1288@item -( @var{archives} -)
1289@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1290The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1291either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1292
1293The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1294references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1295the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1296archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1297object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1298would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1299they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1300resolved.
1301
1302Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1303it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1304more archives.
1305
69da35b5
NC
1306@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1307@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1308@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1309@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1310Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1311recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1312and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1313the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1314behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1315so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1316restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1317
4a43e768
AM
1318@kindex --as-needed
1319@kindex --no-as-needed
1320@item --as-needed
1321@itemx --no-as-needed
1322This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1323on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1324the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1325on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1326needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1327emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1328non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1329the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1330non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1331Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1332the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1333needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1334from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1335
e56f61be
L
1336@kindex --add-needed
1337@kindex --no-add-needed
1338@item --add-needed
1339@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1340These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1341their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1342options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1343and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1344
252b5132
RH
1345@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1346@item -assert @var{keyword}
1347This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1348
1349@kindex -Bdynamic
1350@kindex -dy
1351@kindex -call_shared
1352@item -Bdynamic
1353@itemx -dy
1354@itemx -call_shared
1355Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1356for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1357default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1358for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1359multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1360@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1361
a1ab1d2a
UD
1362@kindex -Bgroup
1363@item -Bgroup
1364Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1365section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1366object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1367@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1368only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1369
252b5132
RH
1370@kindex -Bstatic
1371@kindex -dn
1372@kindex -non_shared
1373@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1374@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1375@itemx -dn
1376@itemx -non_shared
1377@itemx -static
1378Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1379platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1380variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1381may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1382library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1383option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1384option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1385shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1386references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1387libraries.
252b5132
RH
1388
1389@kindex -Bsymbolic
1390@item -Bsymbolic
1391When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1392definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1393for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1394within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1395@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1396executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1397the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1398support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1399
40b36307
L
1400@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1401@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1402When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1403symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1404This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1405when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1406to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1407This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1408libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1409
55255dae
L
1410@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1411@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1412Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1413typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1414global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1415within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1416to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1417in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1418which support shared libraries.
1419
1420The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1421scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1422
40b36307
L
1423@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1424@item --dynamic-list-data
1425Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1426
1427@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1428@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1429Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1430is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1431
0b8a70d9
L
1432@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1433@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1434Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1435
252b5132
RH
1436@kindex --check-sections
1437@kindex --no-check-sections
1438@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1439@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1440Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1441been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1442perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1443suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1444allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1445restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1446Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1447force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1448option.
252b5132 1449
ddbb8a31
NC
1450@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1451@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1452@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1453@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1454This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1455by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1456command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1457output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1458input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1459specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1460follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1461behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1462
1463This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1464libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1465mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1466their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1467required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1468the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1469dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1470symbols.
1471
252b5132
RH
1472@cindex cross reference table
1473@kindex --cref
1474@item --cref
1475Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1476generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1477Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1478
1479The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1480easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1481sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1482symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1483definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1484where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1485symbol are listed.
252b5132 1486
4818e05f
AM
1487@cindex common allocation
1488@kindex --no-define-common
1489@item --no-define-common
1490This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1491The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1492@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1493
1494The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1495the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1496of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1497forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1498Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1499from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1500This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1501and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1502duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1503paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1504
7bdf4127
AB
1505@cindex group allocation in linker script
1506@cindex section groups
1507@cindex COMDAT
1508@kindex --force-group-allocation
1509@item --force-group-allocation
1510This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1511normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1512default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1513change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1514command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1515effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1516
252b5132 1517@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1518@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1519@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1520Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1521address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1522times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1523limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1524context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1525symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1526constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1527using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1528@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1529equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1530
1531@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1532@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1533@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1534@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1535@itemx --no-demangle
1536These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1537and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1538present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1539underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1540mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1541different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1542to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1543demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1544is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1545
1546@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1547@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1548@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1549@item -I@var{file}
1550@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1551Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1552generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1553linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1554doing.
1555
9b8b325a
RF
1556@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1557@item --no-dynamic-linker
1558When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1559linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1560executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1561entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1562
a70f34c0
NC
1563@kindex --embedded-relocs
1564@item --embedded-relocs
1565This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1566that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1567is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1568targets.
1569
7ce691ae 1570@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1571@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1572@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1573@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578@item --force-exe-suffix
1579Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588@kindex --gc-sections
1589@kindex --no-gc-sections
1590@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1591@item --gc-sections
1592@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1593Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1594targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1595performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1596@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1599
d5465ba2
AM
1600@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1609
ac69cbc6 1610This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1611@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1612specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1614
c17d87de
NC
1615@kindex --print-gc-sections
1616@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617@cindex garbage collection
1618@item --print-gc-sections
1619@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1625line.
1626
22185505 1627@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628@cindex garbage collection
1629@item --gc-keep-exported
1630When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1637ELF format targets.
1638
30824704
RM
1639@kindex --print-output-format
1640@cindex output format
1641@item --print-output-format
1642Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1645
3604cb1f
TG
1646@kindex --print-memory-usage
1647@cindex memory usage
1648@item --print-memory-usage
1649Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1654
1655@smallexample
1656Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1659@end smallexample
1660
252b5132
RH
1661@cindex help
1662@cindex usage
1663@kindex --help
1664@item --help
1665Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1666
ea20a7da
CC
1667@kindex --target-help
1668@item --target-help
1669Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1670
2509a395
SL
1671@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1673Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1674@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1675
1676@cindex memory usage
1677@kindex --no-keep-memory
1678@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1679@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1681instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1682necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1683while linking a large executable.
1684
1685@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1686@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1687@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1688@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1689Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1690is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1691The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1692behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1693libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1694
aa713662
L
1695@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1696@kindex -z muldefs
1697@item --allow-multiple-definition
1698@itemx -z muldefs
1699Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1700report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1701first definition will be used.
1702
b79e8c78 1703@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1704@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1705@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1706@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1707Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1708This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1709determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1710shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1711how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1712
903249d7
NC
1713The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1714referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1715an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1716a shared library.
1717
1718The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1719libraries specified at link time are that:
1720
1721@itemize @bullet
1722@item
1723A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1724that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1725resolvable at load time.
1726@item
1727There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1728symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1729
1730The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1731select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1732architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1733appropriate memset function.
1734@end itemize
b79e8c78 1735
31941635
L
1736@kindex --no-undefined-version
1737@item --no-undefined-version
1738Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1739it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1740will be issued instead.
1741
3e3b46e5
PB
1742@kindex --default-symver
1743@item --default-symver
1744Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1745exported symbols.
1746
1747@kindex --default-imported-symver
1748@item --default-imported-symver
1749Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1750imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1751
252b5132
RH
1752@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1753@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1754Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1755files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1756been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1757This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1758errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1759have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1760inappropriate.
1761
fe7929ce
AM
1762@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1763@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1764Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1765library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1766
252b5132
RH
1767@kindex --no-whole-archive
1768@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1769Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1770archive files.
1771
1772@cindex output file after errors
1773@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1774@item --noinhibit-exec
1775Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1776Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1777errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1778when it issues any error whatsoever.
1779
0a9c1c8e
CD
1780@kindex -nostdlib
1781@item -nostdlib
1782Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1783command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1784(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1785
252b5132 1786@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1787@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1788@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1789@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1790file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1791@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1792object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1793object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1794should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1795usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1796name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1797list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1798command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1799this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1800@end ifclear
1801
76359541
TP
1802@kindex --out-implib
1803@item --out-implib @var{file}
1804Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1805the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1806library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1807may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1808behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1809step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1810the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1811
36af4a4e
JJ
1812@kindex -pie
1813@kindex --pic-executable
1814@item -pie
1815@itemx --pic-executable
1816@cindex position independent executables
1817Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1818ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1819libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1820address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1821normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1822defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1823
252b5132
RH
1824@kindex -qmagic
1825@item -qmagic
1826This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1827
1828@kindex -Qy
1829@item -Qy
1830This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1831
1832@kindex --relax
1833@cindex synthesizing linker
1834@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1835@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1836@item --relax
28d5f677 1837@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1838An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1839@ifset GENERIC
1840This option is only supported on a few targets.
1841@end ifset
1842@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1843@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1844@end ifset
1845@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1846@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1847@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1848@ifset XTENSA
1849@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1850@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1851@ifset M68HC11
1852@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1853@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1854@ifset NIOSII
1855@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1856@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1857@ifset POWERPC
1858@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1859@end ifset
252b5132 1860
28d5f677
NC
1861On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1865instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1866
1867On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1869@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1870This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1872@end ifset
1873
1874@ifset GENERIC
1875On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1876but ignored.
1877@end ifset
1878
28d5f677
NC
1879On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1881
252b5132
RH
1882@cindex retaining specified symbols
1883@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1885@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1887Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1890@ifset GENERIC
1891(such as VxWorks)
1892@end ifset
1893where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1894run-time memory.
1895
1896@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897or symbols needed for relocations.
1898
1899You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1901
1902@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1903@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1904@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1905@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1906Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1907linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1908arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1909them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1910also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1912@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1913ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1915
ff5dcc92 1916The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1917SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1918@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1922file systems.
252b5132 1923
ff5dcc92 1924For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1925followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1926the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1927@end ifset
1928
1929@ifset GENERIC
1930@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1931@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1933When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1935of the input files.
1936
1937When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1940explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1941specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1942@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1943either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944appearing multiple times.
1945
e680a6b6
NC
1946The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
195064-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1951
1952The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1954supported.
1955
28c309a2
NC
1956This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959runtime linker would do.
1960
252b5132 1961The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1962libraries:
252b5132
RH
1963@enumerate
1964@item
ff5dcc92 1965Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1966@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1967Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1971at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1974@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1975On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1978@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1979On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1981@item
a1b8d843 1982For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1983variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1984@item
ec4eb78a
L
1985For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1989@item
252b5132
RH
1990The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1991@item
1992For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1994@end enumerate
1995
1996If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997warning and continue with the link.
1998@end ifset
1999
2000@kindex -shared
2001@kindex -Bshareable
2002@item -shared
2003@itemx -Bshareable
2004@cindex shared libraries
2005Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2007shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2008undefined symbols in the link.
2009
252b5132 2010@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2011@item --sort-common
2012@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2014This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2020
2509a395
SL
2021@kindex --sort-section=name
2022@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2023This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024patterns in the linker script.
2025
2509a395
SL
2026@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2028This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029patterns in the linker script.
2030
a70f34c0
NC
2031@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2036
252b5132 2037@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2038@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2039Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2040each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2042
2043@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2044@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2045Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2046output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2047This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2048certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2054many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --stats
2057@item --stats
2058Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059as execution time and memory usage.
2060
2509a395 2061@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2062@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2066
a70f34c0
NC
2067@kindex --task-link
2068@item --task-link
2069This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2071
252b5132
RH
2072@kindex --traditional-format
2073@cindex traditional format
2074@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2075For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2077use the traditional format instead.
2078
2079@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2080For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2081symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2084trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2085combine duplicate entries.
2086
2509a395
SL
2087@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2089Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2092line.
2093@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2098
2509a395
SL
2099@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2102@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2103@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2107@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2108
2509a395
SL
2109@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2111@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2112When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2114
9d5777a3
RM
2115@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2121
0d705e9f
AM
2122@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2127
560e09e9
NC
2128@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131values for @samp{method}:
2132
2133@table @samp
2134@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2135Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2136
2137@item report-all
da8bce14 2138Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2139
2140@item ignore-in-object-files
2141Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2143
2144@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2149command line.
2150@end table
2151
2152The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2154
2155Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157can change this to a warning.
2158
1715a13c
L
2159@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2161@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2162@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2163Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2164supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2165the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2170@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2171Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2173about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2174is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2178@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2179
7ce691ae 2180@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2181@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2183@item --warn-common
2184Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2185a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2186but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2188Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2189warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2190
2191There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2192
2193@table @samp
2194@item int i = 1;
2195A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2196file.
2197
2198@item extern int i;
2199An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2201variable somewhere.
2202
2203@item int i;
2204A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209a definition of the same variable.
2210@end table
2211
2212The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2216a common symbol.
2217
2218@enumerate
2219@item
2220Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221definition for the symbol.
2222@smallexample
2223@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2226@end smallexample
2227
2228@item
2229Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2232@smallexample
2233@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2234 overriding common
2235@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2236@end smallexample
2237
2238@item
2239Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2240@smallexample
2241@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2242 of `@var{symbol}'
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2244@end smallexample
2245
2246@item
2247Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2248@smallexample
2249@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2252@end smallexample
2253
2254@item
2255Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257encountered in a different order.
2258@smallexample
2259@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2262@end smallexample
2263@end enumerate
2264
2265@kindex --warn-constructors
2266@item --warn-constructors
2267Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269detect the use of global constructors.
2270
2271@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272@item --warn-multiple-gp
2273Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2284
2285@kindex --warn-once
2286@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2288@item --warn-once
2289Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2290which refers to it.
2291
2292@kindex --warn-section-align
2293@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295@item --warn-section-align
2296Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2301
8fdd7217
NC
2302@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2304Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2305
a0c402a5
L
2306@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307@item --warn-alternate-em
2308Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2309
560e09e9
NC
2310@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2315
2316@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2320
252b5132
RH
2321@kindex --whole-archive
2322@cindex including an entire archive
2323@item --whole-archive
2324For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2325@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2326in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329library. This option may be used more than once.
2330
7ec229ce 2331Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2332about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2334list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2336
2509a395
SL
2337@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2339Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2342@var{symbol}.
2343
2344This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2348
2349Here is a trivial example:
2350
2351@smallexample
2352void *
cc2f008e 2353__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2354@{
cc2f008e 2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2357@}
2358@end smallexample
2359
ff5dcc92 2360If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2361all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363call the real @code{malloc} function.
2364
2365You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2366links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2367you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2370
6aa29e7b 2371@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2372@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2373@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2374@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2378
e41b3a13
JJ
2379@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2384
6c1439be
L
2385@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387@item --enable-new-dtags
2388@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2391@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2393If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2394created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395those options are only available for ELF systems.
2396
2d643429 2397@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2398@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2399Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2404
fdc90cb4
JJ
2405@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2411hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2412
0ce398f1
L
2413@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2414@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2417@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2418@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2419@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2420@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2421On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2422compressed using zlib.
2423
2424@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2425sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2426DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2427instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2428also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2429sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2430
2431The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2432@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2433
2434Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2435sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2436for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2437uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2438
2439The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2440involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2441default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2442@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2443
35835446
JR
2444@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2445@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2446This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2447linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2448for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2449about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2450
4f9c04f7 2451Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24521021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2453run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2454has been used.
2455
2456The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2457enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2458
c0065db7
RM
2459@kindex --build-id
2460@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2461@item --build-id
2462@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2463Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2464or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2465unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2466@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2467@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2468@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2469the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2470string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2471@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2472is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2473
2474The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2475that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2476unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2477to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2478file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2479string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2480
2481Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2482@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2483@end table
2484
0285c67d
NC
2485@c man end
2486
36f63dca 2487@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2488
0285c67d
NC
2489@c man begin OPTIONS
2490
ff5dcc92 2491The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2492the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2493normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2494use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2495@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2496like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2497symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2498object file).
2499
2500In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2501support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2502PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2503values by either a space or an equals sign.
2504
ff5dcc92 2505@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2506
2507@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2508@item --add-stdcall-alias
2509If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2510as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2511[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2512
2513@kindex --base-file
2514@item --base-file @var{file}
2515Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2516addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2517@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2518[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2519
2520@kindex --dll
2521@item --dll
2522Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2523@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2524file.
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2526
88183869
DK
2527@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2528@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2529@item --enable-long-section-names
2530@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2531The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2532the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2533for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2534fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2535to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2536allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2537disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2538generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2539as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2540with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2541GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2542information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2543option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2544section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2545when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2546image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2547[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2548
252b5132
RH
2549@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2550@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2551@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2552@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2553If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2554do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2555only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2556resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2557undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2558@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2559to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2560warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2561import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2562to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2563feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2564@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2565mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2566[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2567
522f09cd
KT
2568@kindex --leading-underscore
2569@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2570@item --leading-underscore
2571@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2572For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2573in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2574disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2575
252b5132
RH
2576@cindex DLLs, creating
2577@kindex --export-all-symbols
2578@item --export-all-symbols
2579If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2580be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2581otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2582explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2583attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2584option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2585@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2586@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2587exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2588re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2589such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2590@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2591@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2592Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2593not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2594extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2595(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2596These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2597@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2598@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2599@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2600@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2602
2603@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2604@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2605Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2606exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2608
2927aaca
NC
2609@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2610@item --exclude-all-symbols
2611Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2612[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2613
252b5132
RH
2614@kindex --file-alignment
2615@item --file-alignment
2616Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2617file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2618512.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2620
2621@cindex heap size
2622@kindex --heap
2623@item --heap @var{reserve}
2624@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2625Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2626to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2627committed.
bb10df36 2628[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2629
2630@cindex image base
2631@kindex --image-base
2632@item --image-base @var{value}
2633Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2634the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2635is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2636your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2637other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2638for dlls.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2640
2641@kindex --kill-at
2642@item --kill-at
2643If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2644symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2645[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2646
26d2d8a2
BF
2647@kindex --large-address-aware
2648@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2649If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2650header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2651greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2652or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2653section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2654[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2655
f69a2f97
NC
2656@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2657@item --disable-large-address-aware
2658Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2659This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2660driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2661addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2662[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2663
252b5132
RH
2664@kindex --major-image-version
2665@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2666Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2667[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2668
2669@kindex --major-os-version
2670@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2671Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2673
2674@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2675@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2676Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2677[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2678
2679@kindex --minor-image-version
2680@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2681Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2682[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2683
2684@kindex --minor-os-version
2685@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2686Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2687[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2688
2689@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2690@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2691Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2692[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2693
2694@cindex DEF files, creating
2695@cindex DLLs, creating
2696@kindex --output-def
2697@item --output-def @var{file}
2698The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2699file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2700(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2701library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2702automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2703[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2704
b044cda1 2705@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2706@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2707@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2708@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2709Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2710@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2711By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2712for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2713execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2714[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2715
2716@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2717@item --disable-auto-image-base
2718Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2719user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2720default.
bb10df36 2721[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2722
2723@cindex DLLs, linking to
2724@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2725@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2726When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2727search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2728@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2729between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2730uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2731@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2733
2734@kindex --enable-auto-import
2735@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2736Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2737DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2738building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2739'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2740to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2741specification published by Microsoft.
2742
e2a83dd0
NC
2743Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2744data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2745placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2746around a problem with consts that is described here:
2747http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2748
4d8907ac
DS
2749Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2750see this message:
0d888aac 2751
ece2d90e 2752"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2753documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2754
ece2d90e
NC
2755This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2756ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2757allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2758fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2759constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2760multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2761this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2762of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2763the warning, and exit.
2764
2765There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2766data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2767
2fa9fc65
NC
2768One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2769of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2770this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2771
c0065db7
RM
2772A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2773that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2774there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2775a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2776
2777@example
2778extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2779extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2780 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2781@end example
2782
2783or
2784
2785@example
2786extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2787extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2788 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2789@end example
2790
c0065db7 2791For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2792is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2793
2794@example
2795extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2796extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2797 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2798@end example
2799
c406afaf
NC
2800or
2801
2802@example
2803extern long long extern_ll;
2804extern_ll -->
2805 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2806@end example
2807
2fa9fc65 2808A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2809'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2810@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2811requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2812building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2813merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2814between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2815constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2816
2817Original:
2818@example
2819--foo.h
2820extern int arr[];
2821--foo.c
2822#include "foo.h"
2823void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2824 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2825@}
2826@end example
2827
2828Solution 1:
2829@example
2830--foo.h
2831extern int arr[];
2832--foo.c
2833#include "foo.h"
2834void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2835 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2836 volatile int *parr = arr;
2837 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2838@}
2839@end example
2840
2841Solution 2:
2842@example
2843--foo.h
2844/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2845#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2846 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2847#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2848#else
2849#define FOO_IMPORT
2850#endif
2851extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2852--foo.c
2853#include "foo.h"
2854void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2855 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2856@}
2857@end example
2858
c0065db7 2859A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2860library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2861for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2862functions).
bb10df36 2863[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2864
2865@kindex --disable-auto-import
2866@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2867Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2868@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2869[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2870
2fa9fc65
NC
2871@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2872@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2873If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2874that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2875a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2876environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2877[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2878
2879@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2880@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2881Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2882DLLs.
bb10df36 2883[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2884
b044cda1
CW
2885@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2886@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2887Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2888[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2889
252b5132
RH
2890@kindex --section-alignment
2891@item --section-alignment
2892Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2893addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2894[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2895
2896@cindex stack size
2897@kindex --stack
2898@item --stack @var{reserve}
2899@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2900Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2901to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2902committed.
bb10df36 2903[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2904
2905@kindex --subsystem
2906@item --subsystem @var{which}
2907@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2908@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2909Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2910legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2911@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2912the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2913@var{which}.
bb10df36 2914[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2915
2f563b51
DK
2916The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2917of the PE file header:
2918[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2919
2d5c3743
NC
2920@kindex --high-entropy-va
2921@item --high-entropy-va
2922Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2923(ASLR).
2924
2f563b51
DK
2925@kindex --dynamicbase
2926@item --dynamicbase
2927The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2928randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2929Vista for i386 PE targets.
2930
2931@kindex --forceinteg
2932@item --forceinteg
2933Code integrity checks are enforced.
2934
2935@kindex --nxcompat
2936@item --nxcompat
2937The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2938This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2939
2940@kindex --no-isolation
2941@item --no-isolation
2942Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2943
2944@kindex --no-seh
2945@item --no-seh
2946The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2947this image.
2948
2949@kindex --no-bind
2950@item --no-bind
2951Do not bind this image.
2952
2953@kindex --wdmdriver
2954@item --wdmdriver
2955The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2956
2f563b51
DK
2957@kindex --tsaware
2958@item --tsaware
2959The image is Terminal Server aware.
2960
0cb112f7
CF
2961@kindex --insert-timestamp
2962@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2963@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2964Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2965as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2966other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2967will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2968same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2969can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2970that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2971identically.
252b5132
RH
2972@end table
2973
0285c67d
NC
2974@c man end
2975
ac145307
BS
2976@ifset C6X
2977@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2978
2979@c man begin OPTIONS
2980
2981The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2982libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2983all executables use an index of 0.
2984
2985@table @gcctabopt
2986
2987@kindex --dsbt-size
2988@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2989This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2990or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2991entries.
2992
2993@kindex --dsbt-index
2994@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2995This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2996to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2997executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2998@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2999
fbd9ad90
PB
3000@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3001The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3002exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3003
ac145307
BS
3004@end table
3005
3006@c man end
3007@end ifset
3008
93fd0973
SC
3009@ifset M68HC11
3010@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3011
3012@c man begin OPTIONS
3013
3014The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3015memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3016
3017@table @gcctabopt
3018
3019@kindex --no-trampoline
3020@item --no-trampoline
3021This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3022is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3023instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3024
3025@kindex --bank-window
3026@item --bank-window @var{name}
3027This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3028the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3029The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3030paging and addresses within the memory window.
3031
3032@end table
3033
3034@c man end
3035@end ifset
3036
7fb9f789
NC
3037@ifset M68K
3038@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3039
3040@c man begin OPTIONS
3041
3042The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3043when linking for 68K targets.
3044
3045@table @gcctabopt
3046
3047@kindex --got
3048@item --got=@var{type}
3049This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3050@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3051@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3052Info entry for @file{ld}.
3053
3054@end table
3055
3056@c man end
3057@end ifset
3058
833794fc
MR
3059@ifset MIPS
3060@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3061
3062@c man begin OPTIONS
3063
3064The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3065generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3066linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3067
3068@table @gcctabopt
3069
3070@kindex --insn32
3071@item --insn32
3072@kindex --no-insn32
3073@itemx --no-insn32
3074These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3075generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3076or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
307732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3078used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3079possible.
3080
8b10b0b3
MR
3081@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3082@item --ignore-branch-isa
3083@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3084@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3085These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3086transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3087accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3088is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3089instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3090equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3091calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3092a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3093an error.
3094
833794fc
MR
3095@end table
3096
3097@c man end
3098@end ifset
3099
252b5132
RH
3100@ifset UsesEnvVars
3101@node Environment
3102@section Environment Variables
3103
0285c67d
NC
3104@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3105
560e09e9 3106You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3107@ifclear SingleFormat
3108@code{GNUTARGET},
3109@end ifclear
3110@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3111
36f63dca 3112@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3113@kindex GNUTARGET
3114@cindex default input format
3115@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3116use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3117of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3118@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3119of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3120attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3121this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3122there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3123object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3124BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3125in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3126@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3127
3128@kindex LDEMULATION
3129@cindex default emulation
3130@cindex emulation, default
3131@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3132@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3133behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3134available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3135the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3136variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3137linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3138
3139@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3140@cindex demangling, default
3141Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3142@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3143default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3144a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3145may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3146options.
3147
0285c67d
NC
3148@c man end
3149@end ifset
3150
252b5132
RH
3151@node Scripts
3152@chapter Linker Scripts
3153
3154@cindex scripts
3155@cindex linker scripts
3156@cindex command files
3157Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3158written in the linker command language.
3159
3160The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3161the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3162the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3163more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3164direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3165described below.
3166
3167The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3168yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3169linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3170to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3171such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3172
3173You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3174line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3175default linker script.
3176
3177You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3178to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3179Linker Scripts}.
3180
3181@menu
3182* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3183* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3184* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3185* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3186* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3187* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3188* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3189* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3190* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3191* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3192* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3193@end menu
3194
3195@node Basic Script Concepts
3196@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3197@cindex linker script concepts
3198We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3199describe the linker script language.
3200
3201The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3202file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3203@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3204The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3205purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3206among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3207section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3208in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3209
3210Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3211also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3212contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3213the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3214A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3215area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3216loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3217which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3218of debugging information.
3219
3220Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3221first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3222the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3223@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3224section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3225same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3226is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3227(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3228based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3229RAM address would be the VMA.
3230
3231You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3232program with the @samp{-h} option.
3233
3234Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3235@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3236has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3237information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3238will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3239static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3240referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3241
3242You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3243program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3244option.
3245
3246@node Script Format
3247@section Linker Script Format
3248@cindex linker script format
3249Linker scripts are text files.
3250
3251You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3252either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3253symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3254generally ignored.
3255
3256Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3257If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3258otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3259double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3260file name.
3261
3262You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3263@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3264to whitespace.
3265
3266@node Simple Example
3267@section Simple Linker Script Example
3268@cindex linker script example
3269@cindex example of linker script
3270Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3271
3272The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3273@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3274memory layout of the output file.
3275
3276The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3277describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3278code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3279@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3280Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3281your input files.
3282
3283For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32840x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3285linker script which will do that:
3286@smallexample
3287SECTIONS
3288@{
3289 . = 0x10000;
3290 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3291 . = 0x8000000;
3292 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3293 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3294@}
3295@end smallexample
3296
3297You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3298followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3299descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3300
252b5132
RH
3301The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3302sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3303counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3304other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3305current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3306incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3307@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3308
3309The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3310required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3311after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3312which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3313wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3314means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3315
3316Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3317@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3318@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3319
3320The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3321the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3322at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3323output section, the value of the location counter will be
3324@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3325effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3326immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3327
3328The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3329alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3330example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3331sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3332may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3333sections.
3334
3335That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3336
3337@node Simple Commands
3338@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3339@cindex linker script simple commands
3340In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3341
3342@menu
3343* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3344* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3345@ifclear SingleFormat
3346* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3347@end ifclear
3348
4a93e180 3349* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3350* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3351@end menu
3352
3353@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3354@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3355@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3356@cindex start of execution
3357@cindex first instruction
3358@cindex entry point
3359The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3360point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3361entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3362@smallexample
3363ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3364@end smallexample
3365
3366There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3367entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3368stopping when one of them succeeds:
3369@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3370@item
252b5132 3371the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3372@item
252b5132 3373the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3374@item
3ab904c4
NC
3375the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3376targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3377check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3378@item
252b5132 3379the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3380@item
252b5132
RH
3381The address @code{0}.
3382@end itemize
3383
3384@node File Commands
36f63dca 3385@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3386@cindex linker script file commands
3387Several linker script commands deal with files.
3388
3389@table @code
3390@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3391@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3392@cindex including a linker script
3393Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3394be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3395with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
339610 levels deep.
3397
4006703d
NS
3398You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3399@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3400
252b5132
RH
3401@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3402@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3403@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3404@cindex input files in linker scripts
3405@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3406@cindex linker script input object files
3407The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3408in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3409
3410For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3411a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3412then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3413
3414In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3415script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3416
e3f2db7f
AO
3417In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3418with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3419located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3420for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3421open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3422linker will search through the archive library search path.
3423The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3424as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3425path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3426@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3427
ff5dcc92 3428If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3429name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3430@samp{-l}.
3431
3432When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3433files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3434script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3435
3436@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3437@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3438@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3439@cindex grouping input files
3440The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3441files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3442new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3443in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3444
b717d30e
JJ
3445@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3446@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3447@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3448This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3449commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3450as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3451with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3452when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3453@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3454and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3455setting afterwards.
3456
252b5132
RH
3457@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3458@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3459@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3460The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3461@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3462@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3463Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3464precedence.
3465
3466You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3467output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3468
3469@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3470@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3471@cindex library search path in linker script
3472@cindex archive search path in linker script
3473@cindex search path in linker script
3474The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3475@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3476@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3477on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3478are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3479the command line option are searched first.
3480
3481@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3482@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3483@cindex first input file
3484The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3485that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3486though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3487when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3488first file.
3489@end table
3490
3491@ifclear SingleFormat
3492@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3493@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3494A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3495
3496@table @code
3497@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3498@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3499@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3500@cindex output file format in linker script
3501The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3502output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3503exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3504(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3505line option takes precedence.
3506
3507You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3508formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3509This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3510desired endianness.
3511
3512If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3513will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3514output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3515used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3516
3517For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3518command:
3519@smallexample
3520OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3521@end smallexample
3522This says that the default format for the output file is
3523@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3524option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3525format.
3526
3527@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3528@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3529@cindex input file format in linker script
3530The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3531files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3532This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3533(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3534is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3535command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3536@end table
3537@end ifclear
3538
4a93e180
NC
3539@node REGION_ALIAS
3540@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3541@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3542@cindex region alias
3543@cindex region names
3544
3545Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3546@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3547
3548@smallexample
3549REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3550@end smallexample
3551
3552The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3553memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3554to memory regions. An example follows.
3555
3556Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3557memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3558that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3559non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3560access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3561read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3562sections:
3563
3564@itemize @bullet
3565@item
3566@code{.text} program code;
3567@item
3568@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3569@item
3570@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3571@item
3572@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3573@end itemize
3574
3575The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3576part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3577output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3578systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3579@code{C}:
3580@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3581@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3582@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3583@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3584@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3585@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3586@end multitable
3587The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3588loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3589the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3590the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3591
3592The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3593includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3594memory layout:
3595@smallexample
3596INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3597
3598SECTIONS
3599 @{
3600 .text :
3601 @{
3602 *(.text)
3603 @} > REGION_TEXT
3604 .rodata :
3605 @{
3606 *(.rodata)
3607 rodata_end = .;
3608 @} > REGION_RODATA
3609 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3610 @{
3611 data_start = .;
3612 *(.data)
3613 @} > REGION_DATA
3614 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3615 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3616 .bss :
3617 @{
3618 *(.bss)
3619 @} > REGION_BSS
3620 @}
3621@end smallexample
3622
3623Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3624regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3625variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3626@table @code
3627@item A
3628Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3629@smallexample
3630MEMORY
3631 @{
3632 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3633 @}
3634
3635REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3636REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3637REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3638REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3639@end smallexample
3640@item B
3641Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3642into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3643@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3644@smallexample
3645MEMORY
3646 @{
3647 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3648 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3649 @}
3650
3651REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3652REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3653REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3654REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3655@end smallexample
3656@item C
3657Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3658@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3659initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3660system start into the @code{RAM}.
3661@smallexample
3662MEMORY
3663 @{
3664 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3665 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3666 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3667 @}
3668
3669REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3670REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3671REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3672REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3673@end smallexample
3674@end table
3675
3676It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3677@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3678necessary:
3679@smallexample
3680#include <string.h>
3681
3682extern char data_start [];
3683extern char data_size [];
3684extern char data_load_start [];
3685
3686void copy_data(void)
3687@{
3688 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3689 @{
3690 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3691 @}
3692@}
3693@end smallexample
3694
252b5132 3695@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3696@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3697There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3698
3699@table @code
3700@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3701@kindex ASSERT
3702@cindex assertion in linker script
3703Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3704with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3705
fd1c4238
NC
3706Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3707take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3708inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3709for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3710symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3711
3712@smallexample
3713 .stack :
3714 @{
3715 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3716 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3717 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3718 @}
3719@end smallexample
3720
3721will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3722PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3723can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3724
3725@smallexample
3726 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3727 .stack :
3728 @{
3729 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3730 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3731 @}
3732@end smallexample
3733
3734will work.
3735
252b5132
RH
3736@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3737@kindex EXTERN
3738@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3739Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3740symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3741modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3742each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3743command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3744
3745@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3746@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3747@cindex common allocation in linker script
3748This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3749to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3750output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3751
4818e05f
AM
3752@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3753@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3754@cindex common allocation in linker script
3755This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3756command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3757to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3758
7bdf4127
AB
3759@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3760@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3761@cindex group allocation in linker script
3762@cindex section groups
3763@cindex COMDAT
3764This command has the same effect as the
3765@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3766@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3767and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3768specified (@samp{-r}).
3769
53d25da6
AM
3770@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3771@kindex INSERT
3772@cindex insert user script into default script
3773This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3774augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3775inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3776@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3777default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3778sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3779linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3780insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3781linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3782default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3783of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3784to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3785is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3786
3787@smallexample
3788SECTIONS
3789@{
3790 OVERLAY :
3791 @{
3792 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3793 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3794 @}
3795@}
3796INSERT AFTER .text;
3797@end smallexample
3798
252b5132
RH
3799@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3800@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3801@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3802This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3803references among certain output sections.
3804
3805In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3806using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3807will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3808errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3809a function defined in the other section.
3810
3811The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3812@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3813an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3814@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3815names.
3816
cdf96953
MF
3817@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3818@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3819@cindex cross references
3820This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3821references to one section from a list of other sections.
3822
3823The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3824output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3825a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3826there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3827must never call back.
3828
3829The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3830The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3831If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3832the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3833status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3834names, not input section names.
3835
252b5132
RH
3836@ifclear SingleFormat
3837@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3838@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3839@cindex machine architecture
3840@cindex architecture
3841Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3842of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3843architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3844the @samp{-f} option.
3845@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3846
3847@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3848@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3849This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3850@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3851in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3852@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3853@end table
3854
3855@node Assignments
3856@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3857@cindex assignment in scripts
3858@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3859@cindex variables, defining
3860You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3861the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3862
3863@menu
3864* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3865* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3866* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3867* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3868* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3869@end menu
3870
3871@node Simple Assignments
3872@subsection Simple Assignments
3873
3874You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3875
3876@table @code
3877@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3878@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3879@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3880@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3881@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3882@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3883@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3884@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3885@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3886@end table
3887
3888The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3889@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3890defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3891
3892The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3893may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3894
3895The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3896
3897Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3898
3899You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3900statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3901section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3902
3903The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3904expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3905
3906Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3907assignments may be used:
3908
3909@smallexample
3910floating_point = 0;
3911SECTIONS
3912@{
3913 .text :
3914 @{
3915 *(.text)
3916 _etext = .;
3917 @}
156e34dd 3918 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3919 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3920@}
3921@end smallexample
3922@noindent
3923In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3924zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3925the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3926defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3927upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3928
eb8476a6
MR
3929@node HIDDEN
3930@subsection HIDDEN
3931@cindex HIDDEN
3932For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3933exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3934
3935Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3936@code{HIDDEN}:
3937
3938@smallexample
3939HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3940SECTIONS
3941@{
3942 .text :
3943 @{
3944 *(.text)
3945 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3946 @}
3947 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3948 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3949@}
3950@end smallexample
3951@noindent
3952In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3953
252b5132
RH
3954@node PROVIDE
3955@subsection PROVIDE
3956@cindex PROVIDE
3957In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3958only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3959the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3960@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3961@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3962@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3963@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3964@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3965
3966Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3967@smallexample
3968SECTIONS
3969@{
3970 .text :
3971 @{
3972 *(.text)
3973 _etext = .;
3974 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3975 @}
3976@}
3977@end smallexample
3978
3979In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3980underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3981the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3982underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3983If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3984linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3985
7af8e998
L
3986@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3987@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3988@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3989Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3990hidden and won't be exported.
3991
73ae6183
NC
3992@node Source Code Reference
3993@subsection Source Code Reference
3994
3995Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3996intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3997a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3998symbol that does not have a value.
3999
4000Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4001transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4002stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4003prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4004mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4005of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4006variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4007linker script variable might be referred to as:
4008
4009@smallexample
4010 extern int foo;
4011@end smallexample
4012
4013But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4014
4015@smallexample
4016 _foo = 1000;
4017@end smallexample
4018
4019In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4020transformation has taken place.
4021
4022When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4023things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4024in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4025second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4026table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4027contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4028value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4029
4030@smallexample
4031 int foo = 1000;
4032@end smallexample
4033
10bf6894 4034creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4035holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4036number 1000 is initially stored.
4037
4038When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4039first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4040memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4041So:
4042
4043@smallexample
4044 foo = 1;
4045@end smallexample
4046
4047looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4048associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4049address. Whereas:
4050
4051@smallexample
4052 int * a = & foo;
4053@end smallexample
4054
10bf6894 4055looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4056and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4057the variable @samp{a}.
4058
4059Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4060the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4061an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4062
4063@smallexample
4064 foo = 1000;
4065@end smallexample
4066
4067creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4068the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4069address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4070linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4071access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4072
4073Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4074you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4075use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4076section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4077linker script contains these declarations:
4078
4079@smallexample
4080@group
4081 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4082 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4083 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4084@end group
4085@end smallexample
4086
4087Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4088
4089@smallexample
4090@group
4091 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4092
73ae6183
NC
4093 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4094@end group
4095@end smallexample
4096
4097Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4098Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4099arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4100
4101@smallexample
4102@group
4103 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4104
4105 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4106@end group
4107@end smallexample
4108
4109Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4110operators.
73ae6183 4111
252b5132 4112@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4113@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4114@kindex SECTIONS
4115The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4116into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4117
4118The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4119@smallexample
4120SECTIONS
4121@{
4122 @var{sections-command}
4123 @var{sections-command}
4124 @dots{}
4125@}
4126@end smallexample
4127
4128Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4129
4130@itemize @bullet
4131@item
4132an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4133@item
4134a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4135@item
4136an output section description
4137@item
4138an overlay description
4139@end itemize
4140
4141The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4142@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4143those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4144understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4145the layout of the output file.
4146
4147Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4148below.
4149
4150If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4151linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4152section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4153input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4154example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4155in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4156
4157@menu
4158* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4159* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4160* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4161* Input Section:: Input section description
4162* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4163* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4164* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4165* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4166* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4167@end menu
4168
4169@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4170@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4171The full description of an output section looks like this:
4172@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4173@group
7e7d5768 4174@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4175 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4176 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4177 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4178 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4179 @{
4180 @var{output-section-command}
4181 @var{output-section-command}
4182 @dots{}
abc9061b 4183 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4184@end group
4185@end smallexample
4186
4187Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4188
4189The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4190name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4191The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4192the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4193The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4194
4195Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4196
4197@itemize @bullet
4198@item
4199a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4200@item
4201an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4202@item
4203data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4204@item
4205a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4206@end itemize
4207
4208@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4209@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4210@cindex name, section
4211@cindex section name
4212The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4213meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4214support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4215must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4216example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4217output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4218names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4219quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4220characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4221commas must be quoted.
4222
4223The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4224Discarding}.
4225
4226@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4227@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4228@cindex address, section
4229@cindex section address
4230The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4231address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4232is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4233
4234If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4235section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4236to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4237alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4238contained within the output section.
4239
4240The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4241
4242@itemize @bullet
4243@item
4244If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4245is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4246in that region.
4247
4248@item
4249If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4250regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4251section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4252be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4253
4254@item
4255If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4256the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4257counter.
4258@end itemize
4259
4260@noindent
4261For example:
4262
252b5132
RH
4263@smallexample
4264.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4265@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4266
252b5132
RH
4267@noindent
4268and
ea5cae92 4269
252b5132
RH
4270@smallexample
4271.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4272@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4273
252b5132
RH
4274@noindent
4275are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4276@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4277counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4278counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4279input sections.
252b5132
RH
4280
4281The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4282For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4283so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4284do something like this:
4285@smallexample
4286.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4287@end smallexample
4288@noindent
4289This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4290aligned upward to the specified value.
4291
4292Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4293location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4294sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4295
4296@node Input Section
36f63dca 4297@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4298@cindex input sections
4299@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4300The most common output section command is an input section description.
4301
4302The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4303You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4304in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4305map the input files into your memory layout.
4306
4307@menu
4308* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4309* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4310* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4311* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4312* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4313@end menu
4314
4315@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4316@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4317@cindex input section basics
4318An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4319by a list of section names in parentheses.
4320
4321The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4322describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4323
4324The most common input section description is to include all input
4325sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4326include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4327@smallexample
4328*(.text)
4329@end smallexample
4330@noindent
18625d54 4331Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4332@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4333of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4334match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4335example:
252b5132 4336@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4337EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4338@end smallexample
4339@noindent
4340will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4341and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4342placed inside the section list, for example:
4343@smallexample
b4346c09 4344*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4345@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4346@noindent
4347The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4348two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4349more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4350
4351There are two ways to include more than one section:
4352@smallexample
4353*(.text .rdata)
4354*(.text) *(.rdata)
4355@end smallexample
4356@noindent
4357The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4358@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4359first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4360they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4361@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4362@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4363
8f1732fc
AB
4364When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4365is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4366immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4367@smallexample
4368*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4369@end smallexample
4370@noindent
4371will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4372@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4373from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4374exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4375could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4376@smallexample
4377*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4378@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4379@noindent
4380Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4381before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4382all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4383@smallexample
4384EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4385@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4386
252b5132
RH
4387You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4388You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4389needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4390@smallexample
4391data.o(.data)
4392@end smallexample
4393
ae17ab41
CM
4394To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4395of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4396
4397Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4398
4399@smallexample
4400@group
4401SECTIONS @{
4402 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4403 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4404@}
4405@end group
4406@end smallexample
4407
4408In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4409input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4410@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4411@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4412whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4413
967928e9
AM
4414You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4415matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4416with no whitespace around the colon.
4417
4418@table @samp
4419@item archive:file
4420matches file within archive
4421@item archive:
4422matches the whole archive
4423@item :file
4424matches file but not one in an archive
4425@end table
4426
4427Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4428wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4429single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4430@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4431within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4432also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4433other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4434from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4435command.
4436
252b5132
RH
4437If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4438the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4439commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4440@smallexample
4441data.o
4442@end smallexample
4443
967928e9
AM
4444When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4445and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4446characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4447name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4448did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4449though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4450@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4451the archive search path.
4452
4453@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4454@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4455@cindex input section wildcards
4456@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4457@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4458@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4459In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4460name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4461
4462The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4463pattern for the file name.
4464
4465The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4466
4467@table @samp
4468@item *
4469matches any number of characters
4470@item ?
4471matches any single character
4472@item [@var{chars}]
4473matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4474character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4475@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4476@item \
4477quotes the following character
4478@end table
4479
4480When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4481will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4482Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4483exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4484@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4485a @samp{/} character.
4486
4487File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4488specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4489does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4490
4491If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4492appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4493will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4494sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4495@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4496@smallexample
4497.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4498.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4499@end smallexample
4500
bcaa7b3e 4501@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4502Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4503in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4504this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4505pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4506@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4507into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4508
bcaa7b3e
L
4509@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4510@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4511difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4512descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4513Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4514reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4515
02ecc8e9
L
4516@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4517@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4518difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4519ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4520encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4521
bcaa7b3e
L
4522@cindex SORT
4523@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4524
4525When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4526can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4527
4528@enumerate
4529@item
4530@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4531It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4532sections have the same name.
4533@item
4534@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4535It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4536sections have the same alignment.
4537@item
c0065db7 4538@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4539treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4540@item
4541@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4542is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4543@item
4544All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4545@end enumerate
4546
4547When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4548section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4549takes precedence over the command line option.
4550
4551If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4552command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4553treated as nested sorting command.
4554
4555@enumerate
4556@item
4557@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4558@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4559@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4560@item
4561@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4562@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4563@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4564@end enumerate
4565
4566If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4567command line option will be ignored.
4568
eda680f8
L
4569@cindex SORT_NONE
4570@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4571section sorting option.
4572
252b5132
RH
4573If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4574@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4575precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4576
4577This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4578files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4579sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4580The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4581with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4582linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4583@smallexample
4584@group
4585SECTIONS @{
4586 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4587 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4588 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4589 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4590@}
4591@end group
4592@end smallexample
4593
4594@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4595@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4596@cindex common symbol placement
4597@cindex uninitialized data placement
4598A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4599file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4600linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4601named @samp{COMMON}.
4602
4603You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4604other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4605particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4606input files are placed in another section.
4607
4608In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4609@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4610@smallexample
4611.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4612@end smallexample
4613
4614@cindex scommon section
4615@cindex small common symbols
4616Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4617example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4618symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4619different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4620the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4621symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4622to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4623locations.
4624
4625@cindex [COMMON]
4626You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4627notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4628@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4629
4630@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4631@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4632@cindex KEEP
4633@cindex garbage collection
4634When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4635it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4636This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4637with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4638@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4639
4640@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4641@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4642The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4643to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4644start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4645@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4646follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4647@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4648@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4649All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4650files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4651
4652@smallexample
4653@group
4654SECTIONS @{
4655 outputa 0x10000 :
4656 @{
4657 all.o
4658 foo.o (.input1)
4659 @}
36f63dca
NC
4660@end group
4661@group
252b5132
RH
4662 outputb :
4663 @{
4664 foo.o (.input2)
4665 foo1.o (.input1)
4666 @}
36f63dca
NC
4667@end group
4668@group
252b5132
RH
4669 outputc :
4670 @{
4671 *(.input1)
4672 *(.input2)
4673 @}
4674@}
4675@end group
a1ab1d2a 4676@end smallexample
252b5132 4677
cbd0eecf
L
4678If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4679and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4680automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4681__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4682indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4683respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4684C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4685
252b5132 4686@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4687@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4688@cindex data
4689@cindex section data
4690@cindex output section data
4691@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4692@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4693@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4694@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4695@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4696You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4697@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4698an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4699parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4700value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4701counter.
4702
4703The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4704store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4705bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4706stored.
4707
4708For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4709of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4710@smallexample
4711BYTE(1)
4712LONG(addr)
4713@end smallexample
4714
4715When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4716same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4717target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4718@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4719@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4720
4721If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4722which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4723When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4724true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4725endianness of the first input object file.
4726
36f63dca 4727Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4728between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4729@smallexample
4730SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4731@end smallexample
4732whereas this will work:
4733@smallexample
4734SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4735@end smallexample
4736
252b5132
RH
4737@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4738@cindex holes, filling
4739@cindex unspecified memory
4740You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4741current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4742otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4743gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4744with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4745necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4746point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4747than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4748different parts of an output section.
4749
4750This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4751value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4752@smallexample
563e308f 4753FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4754@end smallexample
4755
4756The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4757section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4758part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4759entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4760precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4761expression.
252b5132
RH
4762
4763@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4764@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4765There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4766commands.
4767
4768@table @code
4769@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4770@cindex input filename symbols
4771@cindex filename symbols
4772@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4773The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4774The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4775file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4776the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4777
4778This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4779normally used for any other object file format.
4780
4781@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4782@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4783@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4784@item CONSTRUCTORS
4785When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4786unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4787destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4788arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4789automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4790For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4791linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4792@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4793ignored for other object file formats.
4794
4795The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4796constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4797Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4798the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4799first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4800of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4801compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4802formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4803@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4804the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4805destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4806@code{exit}.
4807
4808For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4809arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4810addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4811and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4812linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4813runtime code expects to see.
4814
4815@smallexample
4816 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4817 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4818 *(.ctors)
4819 LONG(0)
4820 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4821 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4822 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4823 *(.dtors)
4824 LONG(0)
4825 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4826@end smallexample
4827
4828If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4829which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4830are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4831are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4832command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4833@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4834@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4835@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4836
4837Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4838and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4839need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4840scripts.
4841
4842@end table
4843
4844@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4845@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4846@cindex discarding sections
4847@cindex sections, discarding
4848@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4849The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4850This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4851may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4852@smallexample
49c13adb 4853.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4854@end smallexample
4855@noindent
4856will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4857@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4858sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4859space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4860too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4861space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4862@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4863@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4864This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4865
a0976ea4 4866The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4867on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4868symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4869the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4870section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4871
4872@cindex /DISCARD/
4873The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4874input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4875section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4876
4877@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4878@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4879@cindex output section attributes
4880We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4881like this:
0c71d759 4882
252b5132 4883@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4884@group
7e7d5768 4885@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4886 [AT(@var{lma})]
4887 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4888 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4889 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4890 @{
4891 @var{output-section-command}
4892 @var{output-section-command}
4893 @dots{}
562d3460 4894 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4895@end group
4896@end smallexample
0c71d759 4897
252b5132
RH
4898We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4899@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4900remaining section attributes.
4901
a1ab1d2a 4902@menu
252b5132
RH
4903* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4904* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4905* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4906* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4907* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4908* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4909* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4910* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4911@end menu
4912
4913@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4914@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4915Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4916parentheses. The following types are defined:
4917
4918@table @code
4919@item NOLOAD
4920The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4921loaded into memory when the program is run.
4922@item DSECT
4923@itemx COPY
4924@itemx INFO
4925@itemx OVERLAY
4926These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4927rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4928marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4929section when the program is run.
4930@end table
4931
4932@kindex NOLOAD
4933@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4934@cindex loading, preventing
4935The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4936the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4937the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4938@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4939need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4940@smallexample
4941@group
4942SECTIONS @{
4943 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4944 @dots{}
4945@}
4946@end group
4947@end smallexample
4948
4949@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4950@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4951@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4952@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4953@cindex load address
4954@cindex section load address
4955Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4956@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4957@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4958specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4959address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4960
ea5cae92
NC
4961The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4962specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4963takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4964load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4965region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4966
4967If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4968section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4969load address:
4970
4971@itemize @bullet
4972@item
4973If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4974the LMA address as well.
4975
4976@item
4977If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4978
4979@item
4980Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4981with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4982section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4983VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4984the last section in the located region.
4985
4986@item
4987If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4988that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4989
4990@item
4991If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4992section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4993@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4994
4995@cindex ROM initialized data
4996@cindex initialized data in ROM
4997This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4998example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4999called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5000@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5001even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5002uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5003defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5004counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5005
5006@smallexample
5007@group
5008SECTIONS
5009 @{
5010 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5011 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5012 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5013 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5014 .bss 0x3000 :
5015 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5016@}
5017@end group
5018@end smallexample
5019
5020The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5021this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5022the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5023how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5024script.
5025
5026@smallexample
5027@group
5028extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5029char *src = &_etext;
5030char *dst = &_data;
5031
ea5cae92
NC
5032/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5033while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5034 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5035
ea5cae92 5036/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5037for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5038 *dst = 0;
5039@end group
5040@end smallexample
5041
bbf115d3
L
5042@node Forced Output Alignment
5043@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5044@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5045@cindex forcing output section alignment
5046@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5047You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5048alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5049intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5050
7e7d5768
AM
5051@node Forced Input Alignment
5052@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5053@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5054@cindex forcing input section alignment
5055@cindex input section alignment
5056You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5057SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5058sections, whether larger or smaller.
5059
0c71d759
NC
5060@node Output Section Constraint
5061@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5062@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5063@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5064@cindex constraints on output sections
5065You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5066of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5067read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5068@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5069
252b5132 5070@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5071@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5072@kindex >@var{region}
5073@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5074@cindex memory regions and sections
5075You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5076using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5077
5078Here is a simple example:
5079@smallexample
5080@group
5081MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5082SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5083@end group
5084@end smallexample
5085
5086@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5087@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5088@kindex :@var{phdr}
5089@cindex section, assigning to program header
5090@cindex program headers and sections
5091You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5092using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5093one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5094assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5095@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5096linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5097
5098Here is a simple example:
5099@smallexample
5100@group
5101PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5102SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5103@end group
5104@end smallexample
5105
5106@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5107@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5108@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5109@cindex section fill pattern
5110@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5111You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5112@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5113(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5114within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5115alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5116necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5117of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5118an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5119fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5120other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5121pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5122expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5123
5124You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5125output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5126
5127Here is a simple example:
5128@smallexample
5129@group
563e308f 5130SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5131@end group
5132@end smallexample
5133
5134@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5135@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5136@kindex OVERLAY
5137@cindex overlays
5138An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5139are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5140the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5141copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5142required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5143can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5144than another.
5145
5146Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5147@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5148output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5149command is as follows:
5150@smallexample
5151@group
5152OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5153 @{
5154 @var{secname1}
5155 @{
5156 @var{output-section-command}
5157 @var{output-section-command}
5158 @dots{}
5159 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5160 @var{secname2}
5161 @{
5162 @var{output-section-command}
5163 @var{output-section-command}
5164 @dots{}
5165 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5166 @dots{}
abc9061b 5167 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5168@end group
5169@end smallexample
5170
5171Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5172section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5173section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5174those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5175except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5176sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5177
abc9061b
CC
5178The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5179the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5180
252b5132
RH
5181The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5182addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5183memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5184whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5185and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5186and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5187
56dd11f0
NC
5188If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5189references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5190the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5191sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5192@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5193
5194For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5195provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5196defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5197@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5198the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5199within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5200symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5201
5202At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5203the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5204
5205Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5206@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5207@smallexample
5208@group
5209 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5210 @{
5211 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5212 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5213 @}
5214@end group
5215@end smallexample
5216@noindent
5217This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5218address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5219@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5220following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5221@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5222@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5223
5224C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5225like the following.
5226
5227@smallexample
5228@group
5229 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5230 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5231 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5232@end group
5233@end smallexample
5234
5235Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5236everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5237example could have been written identically as follows.
5238
5239@smallexample
5240@group
5241 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5242 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5243 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5244 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5245 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5246 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5247 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5248@end group
5249@end smallexample
5250
5251@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5252@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5253@kindex MEMORY
5254@cindex memory regions
5255@cindex regions of memory
5256@cindex allocating memory
5257@cindex discontinuous memory
5258The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5259memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5260
5261The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5262memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5263may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5264can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5265set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5266regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5267around to fit into the available regions.
5268
127fcdff
AB
5269A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5270however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5271specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5272@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5273@smallexample
5274@group
a1ab1d2a 5275MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5276 @{
5277 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5278 @dots{}
5279 @}
5280@end group
5281@end smallexample
5282
5283The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5284region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5285Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5286with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5287must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5288add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5289command.
252b5132
RH
5290
5291@cindex memory region attributes
5292The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5293whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5294not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5295@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5296section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5297the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5298them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5299
5300The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5301@table @samp
5302@item R
5303Read-only section
5304@item W
5305Read/write section
5306@item X
5307Executable section
5308@item A
5309Allocatable section
5310@item I
5311Initialized section
5312@item L
5313Same as @samp{I}
5314@item !
c09e9a8c 5315Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5316@end table
5317
5318If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5319@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5320attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5321in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5322attributes.
5323
5324@kindex ORIGIN =
5325@kindex o =
5326@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5327The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5328the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5329cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5330abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5331@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5332
5333@kindex LENGTH =
5334@kindex len =
5335@kindex l =
5336The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5337region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5338be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5339@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5340
5341In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5342available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5343and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5344linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5345is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5346or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5347explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5348region.
5349
5350@smallexample
5351@group
a1ab1d2a 5352MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5353 @{
5354 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5355 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5356 @}
5357@end group
5358@end smallexample
5359
5360Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5361specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5362@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5363a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5364output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5365was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5366the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5367output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5368region, the linker will issue an error message.
5369
3ec57632 5370It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5371expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5372@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5373
5374@smallexample
5375@group
c0065db7 5376 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5377@end group
5378@end smallexample
5379
252b5132
RH
5380@node PHDRS
5381@section PHDRS Command
5382@kindex PHDRS
5383@cindex program headers
5384@cindex ELF program headers
5385@cindex program segments
5386@cindex segments, ELF
5387The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5388@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5389loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5390program with the @samp{-p} option.
5391
5392When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5393reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5394program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5395This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5396interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5397
5398The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5399in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5400precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5401the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5402not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5403
5404The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5405generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5406ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5407
5408This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5409@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5410
5411@smallexample
5412@group
5413PHDRS
5414@{
5415 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5416 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5417@}
5418@end group
5419@end smallexample
5420
5421The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5422of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5423header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5424with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5425must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5426is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5427
5428Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5429system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5430specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5431sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5432attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5433Section Phdr}.
5434
5435It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5436merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5437repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5438contain the section.
5439
5440If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5441then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5442not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5443convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5444placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5445default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5446segment at all.
5447
5448@kindex FILEHDR
5449@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5450You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5451the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5452The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5453file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5454include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5455segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5456these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5457
5458The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5459value of the keyword.
5460
5461@table @asis
5462@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5463Indicates an unused program header.
5464
5465@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5466Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5467the file.
5468
5469@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5470Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5471
5472@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5473Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5474found.
5475
5476@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5477Indicates a segment holding note information.
5478
5479@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5480A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5481ABI.
5482
5483@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5484Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5485
1a9ccd70
NC
5486@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5487Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5488
252b5132
RH
5489@item @var{expression}
5490An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5491be used for types not defined above.
5492@end table
5493
5494You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5495in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5496@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5497Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5498output section attribute.
5499
5500The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5501which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5502explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5503an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5504header.
5505
5506Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5507headers used on a native ELF system.
5508
5509@example
5510@group
5511PHDRS
5512@{
5513 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5514 interp PT_INTERP ;
5515 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5516 data PT_LOAD ;
5517 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5518@}
5519
5520SECTIONS
5521@{
5522 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5523 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5524 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5525 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5526 @dots{}
5527 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5528 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5529 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5530 @dots{}
5531@}
5532@end group
5533@end example
5534
5535@node VERSION
5536@section VERSION Command
5537@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5538@cindex symbol versions
5539@cindex version script
5540@cindex versions of symbols
5541The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5542only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5543symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5544a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5545shared library.
5546
5547You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5548you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5549also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5550
5551The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5552@smallexample
5553VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5554@end smallexample
5555
5556The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5557Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5558version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5559version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5560version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5561scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5562library.
5563
5564The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5565examples.
5566
5567@smallexample
5568VERS_1.1 @{
5569 global:
5570 foo1;
5571 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5572 old*;
5573 original*;
5574 new*;
252b5132
RH
5575@};
5576
5577VERS_1.2 @{
5578 foo2;
5579@} VERS_1.1;
5580
5581VERS_2.0 @{
5582 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5583 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5584 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5585 "f(int, double)";
5586 @};
252b5132
RH
5587@} VERS_1.2;
5588@end smallexample
5589
5590This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5591version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5592The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5593a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5594of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5595symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5596is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5597in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5598However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5599name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5600
5601Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5602depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5603to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5604
5605Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5606depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5607and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5608
5609When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5610specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5611unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5612unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5613somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5614wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5615wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5616set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5617ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5618
5619The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5620they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5621could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5622However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5623
0f6bf451 5624Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5625in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5626symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5627won't.
5628
5629@smallexample
7c9c73be 5630@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5631@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5632
252b5132
RH
5633When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5634symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5635requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5636shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5637loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5638linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5639application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5640way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5641all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5642search for each symbol reference.
5643
5644The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5645doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5646that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5647functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5648the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5649required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5650that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5651versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5652the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5653
5654There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5655first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5656source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5657script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5658maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5659@smallexample
5660__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5661@end smallexample
5662@noindent
5663in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5664be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5665The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5666@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5667takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5668
5669The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5670function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5671an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5672version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5673linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5674
5675To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5676source file. Here is an example:
5677
5678@smallexample
5679__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5680__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5681__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5682__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5683@end smallexample
5684
5685In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5686unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5687example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5688@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5689
5690When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5691some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5692this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5693@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5694declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5695you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5696
5697If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5698within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5699(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5700specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5701
cb840a31
L
5702You can also specify the language in the version script:
5703
5704@smallexample
5705VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5706@end smallexample
5707
c0065db7 5708The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5709The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5710demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5711patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5712@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5713
86043bbb
MM
5714Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5715described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5716or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5717the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5718whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5719cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5720might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5721should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5722expect when you upgrade.
5723
252b5132
RH
5724@node Expressions
5725@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5726@cindex expressions
5727@cindex arithmetic
5728The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5729that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5730expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5731host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5732
5733You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5734
5735The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5736expressions.
5737
5738@menu
5739* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5740* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5741* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5742* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5743* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5744* Operators:: Operators
5745* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5746* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5747* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5748@end menu
5749
5750@node Constants
5751@subsection Constants
5752@cindex integer notation
5753@cindex constants in linker scripts
5754All constants are integers.
5755
5756As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5757octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5758hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5759@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5760@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5761value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5762
5763@cindex scaled integers
5764@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5765@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5766@cindex suffixes for integers
5767@cindex integer suffixes
5768In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5769constant by
5770@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5771@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5772@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5773@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5774@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5775@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5776@tex
5777${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5778@end tex
5779@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5780respectively. For example, the following
5781all refer to the same quantity:
5782
252b5132 5783@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5784_fourk_1 = 4K;
5785_fourk_2 = 4096;
5786_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5787_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5788@end smallexample
5789
8a308ae8
NC
5790Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5791conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5792
0c71d759
NC
5793@node Symbolic Constants
5794@subsection Symbolic Constants
5795@cindex symbolic constants
5796@kindex CONSTANT
5797It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5798the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5799
5800@table @code
5801@item MAXPAGESIZE
5802@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5803The target's maximum page size.
5804
5805@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5806@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5807The target's default page size.
5808@end table
5809
5810So for example:
5811
5812@smallexample
9d5777a3 5813 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5814@end smallexample
5815
5816will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5817supported by the target.
5818
252b5132
RH
5819@node Symbols
5820@subsection Symbol Names
5821@cindex symbol names
5822@cindex names
5823@cindex quoted symbol names
5824@kindex "
5825Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5826and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5827Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5828specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5829keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5830@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5831"SECTION" = 9;
5832"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5833@end smallexample
5834
5835Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5836to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5837whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5838
ecca9871
L
5839@node Orphan Sections
5840@subsection Orphan Sections
5841@cindex orphan
5842Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5843are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5844script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5845output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5846in which to place the orphaned input section.
5847
5848If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5849an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5850placed at the end of that output section.
5851
5852If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5853sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5854name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5855orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5856one new output section.
5857
5858If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5859then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5860in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5861linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5862attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5863sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5864support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5865
c005eb9e
AB
5866The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5867(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5868output sections an orphan is placed in.
5869
252b5132
RH
5870@node Location Counter
5871@subsection The Location Counter
5872@kindex .
5873@cindex dot
5874@cindex location counter
5875@cindex current output location
5876The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5877current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5878location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5879within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5880anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5881
5882@cindex holes
5883Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5884moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5885location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5886and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5887doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5888
5889@smallexample
5890SECTIONS
5891@{
5892 output :
5893 @{
5894 file1(.text)
5895 . = . + 1000;
5896 file2(.text)
5897 . += 1000;
5898 file3(.text)
563e308f 5899 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5900@}
5901@end smallexample
5902@noindent
5903In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5904located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5905followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5906@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5907@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5908specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5909
5c6bbab8
NC
5910@cindex dot inside sections
5911Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5912current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5913statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5914absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5915however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5916not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5917
5918@smallexample
5919SECTIONS
5920@{
5921 . = 0x100
5922 .text: @{
5923 *(.text)
5924 . = 0x200
5925 @}
5926 . = 0x500
5927 .data: @{
5928 *(.data)
5929 . += 0x600
5930 @}
5931@}
5932@end smallexample
5933
5934The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5935and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5936the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5937much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5938move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5939and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5940the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5941the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5942
b5666f2f
AM
5943@cindex dot outside sections
5944Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5945output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5946needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5947
5948@smallexample
5949SECTIONS
5950@{
5951 start_of_text = . ;
5952 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5953 end_of_text = . ;
5954
5955 start_of_data = . ;
5956 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5957 end_of_data = . ;
5958@}
5959@end smallexample
5960
5961If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5962not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5963between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5964should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5965blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5966the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5967sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5968statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5969special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5970place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5971as follows:
5972
5973@smallexample
5974SECTIONS
5975@{
5976 start_of_text = . ;
5977 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5978 end_of_text = . ;
5979
5980 start_of_data = . ;
5981 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5982 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5983 end_of_data = . ;
5984@}
5985@end smallexample
5986
5987This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5988@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5989placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5990assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5991a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5992section. So you could write:
5993
5994@smallexample
5995SECTIONS
5996@{
5997 start_of_text = . ;
5998 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5999 end_of_text = . ;
6000
6001 . = . ;
6002 start_of_data = . ;
6003 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6004 end_of_data = . ;
6005@}
6006@end smallexample
6007
6008Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6009@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6010
252b5132
RH
6011@need 2000
6012@node Operators
6013@subsection Operators
6014@cindex operators for arithmetic
6015@cindex arithmetic operators
6016@cindex precedence in expressions
6017The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6018the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6019@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6020@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6021@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6022@smallexample
6023precedence associativity Operators Notes
6024(highest)
60251 left ! - ~ (1)
60262 left * / %
60273 left + -
60284 left >> <<
60295 left == != > < <= >=
60306 left &
60317 left |
60328 left &&
60339 left ||
603410 right ? :
603511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6036(lowest)
6037@end smallexample
6038Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6039(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6040(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6041@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6042@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6043@tex
6044\vskip \baselineskip
6045%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6046\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6047\hrule
6048\halign
6049{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6050height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6051&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6052height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6053\noalign{\hrule}
6054height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6055&highest&&&&&\cr
6056% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6057&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6058&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6059&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6060&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6061&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6062&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6063&7&&left&&|&\cr
6064&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6065&9&&left&&||&\cr
6066&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6067&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6068&lowest&&&&&\cr
6069height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6070\hrule}
6071@end tex
6072@iftex
6073{
6074@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6075@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6076@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6077}
6078@end iftex
6079@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6080
6081@node Evaluation
6082@subsection Evaluation
6083@cindex lazy evaluation
6084@cindex expression evaluation order
6085The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6086an expression when absolutely necessary.
6087
6088The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6089address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6090regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6091as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6092
6093However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6094until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6095other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6096for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6097
6098The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6099assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6100allocation.
6101
6102Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6103@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6104
6105If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6106available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6107following
6108@smallexample
6109@group
6110SECTIONS
6111 @{
a1ab1d2a 6112 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6113 @{ *(.text) @}
6114 @}
6115@end group
6116@end smallexample
6117@noindent
6118will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6119address}.
6120
6121@node Expression Section
6122@subsection The Section of an Expression
6123@cindex expression sections
6124@cindex absolute expressions
6125@cindex relative expressions
6126@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6127@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6128@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6129Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6130relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6131using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6132value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6133symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6134operations.
6135
abf4be64
AM
6136Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6137section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6138address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6139@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6140functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6141One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6142(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6143differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6144versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6145section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6146Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6147absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6148given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6149everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6150
6151In the following simple example,
252b5132 6152
7542af2a
AM
6153@smallexample
6154@group
6155SECTIONS
6156 @{
6157 . = 0x100;
6158 __executable_start = 0x100;
6159 .data :
6160 @{
6161 . = 0x10;
6162 __data_start = 0x10;
6163 *(.data)
6164 @}
6165 @dots{}
6166 @}
6167@end group
6168@end smallexample
252b5132 6169
7542af2a
AM
6170both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6171address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6172@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6173section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6174
5c3049d2
AM
6175For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6176addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6177
6178@itemize @bullet
6179@item
c05f749e
AM
6180Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6181operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6182absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6183@item
7542af2a
AM
6184Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6185relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6186and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6187@item
c05f749e
AM
6188Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6189in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6190address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6191before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6192@end itemize
6193
6194The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6195
6196@itemize @bullet
6197@item
6198An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6199@item
6200The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6201@item
9bc8bb33 6202The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6203relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6204(after above conversions) is also a number when
6205@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6206but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6207@item
6208The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6209relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6210section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6211@item
6212The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6213conversions) is an absolute address.
6214@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6215
6216You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6217to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6218create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6219section @samp{.data}:
6220@smallexample
6221SECTIONS
6222 @{
6223 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6224 @}
6225@end smallexample
6226@noindent
6227If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6228@samp{.data} section.
6229
7542af2a
AM
6230Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6231particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6232
252b5132
RH
6233@node Builtin Functions
6234@subsection Builtin Functions
6235@cindex functions in expressions
6236The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6237use in linker script expressions.
6238
6239@table @code
6240@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6241@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6242@cindex expression, absolute
6243Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6244of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6245value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6246normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6247
6248@item ADDR(@var{section})
6249@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6250@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6251Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6252script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6253the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6254@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6255@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6256the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6257@smallexample
6258@group
6259SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6260 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6261 @{
252b5132
RH
6262 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6263 @dots{}
6264 @}
6265 .output :
6266 @{
6267 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6268 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6269 @}
6270@dots{} @}
6271@end group
6272@end smallexample
6273
876f4090
NS
6274@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6275@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6276@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6277@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6278@cindex round up location counter
6279@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6280@cindex round up expression
6281@cindex align expression
6282Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6283to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6284doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6285arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6286expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6287equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6288
6289Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6290next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6291variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6292input sections:
252b5132
RH
6293@smallexample
6294@group
6295SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6296 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6297 *(.data)
6298 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6299 @}
6300@dots{} @}
6301@end group
6302@end smallexample
6303@noindent
6304The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6305a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6306a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6307of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6308
6309The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6310
362c1d1a
NS
6311@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6312@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6313@cindex section alignment
6314Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6315been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6316evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6317the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6318value in that section.
6319@smallexample
6320@group
6321SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6322 .output @{
6323 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6324 @dots{}
6325 @}
6326@dots{} @}
6327@end group
6328@end smallexample
6329
252b5132
RH
6330@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6331@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6332This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6333scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6334section.
6335
2d20f7bf
JJ
6336@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6337@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6338This is equivalent to either
6339@smallexample
6340(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6341@end smallexample
6342or
6343@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6344(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6345 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6346@end smallexample
6347@noindent
6348depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6349for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6350@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6351If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6352memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6353bytes in the on-disk file.
6354
6355This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6356any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6357@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6358be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6359working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6360
6361@noindent
6362Example:
6363@smallexample
6364 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6365@end smallexample
6366
6367@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6368@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6369This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6370evaluation purposes.
6371
6372@smallexample
6373 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6374@end smallexample
6375
a4f5ad88
JJ
6376@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6377@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6378This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6379@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6380When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6381does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6382@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6383boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6384it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6385@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6386padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6387section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6388
6389@smallexample
6390 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6391@end smallexample
6392
252b5132
RH
6393@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6394@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6395@cindex symbol defaults
6396Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6397defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6398return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6399default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6400shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6401the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6402existed, its value is preserved:
6403
6404@smallexample
6405@group
6406SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6407 .text : @{
6408 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6409 @dots{}
6410 @}
6411 @dots{}
6412@}
6413@end group
6414@end smallexample
6415
3ec57632
NC
6416@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6417@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6418Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6419
252b5132
RH
6420@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6421@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6422@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6423Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6424Section LMA}).
6425
2e53f7d6
NC
6426@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6427@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6428Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6429@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6430
252b5132
RH
6431@kindex MAX
6432@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6433Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6434
6435@kindex MIN
6436@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6437Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6438
6439@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6440@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6441@cindex unallocated address, next
6442Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6443This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6444use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6445output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6446
3ec57632
NC
6447@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6448@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6449Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6450
ba916c8a
MM
6451@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6452@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6453Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6454value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6455@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6456will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6457can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6458``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6459name.
6460
252b5132
RH
6461@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6462@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6463@cindex section size
6464Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6465been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6466evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6467@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6468@smallexample
6469@group
6470SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6471 .output @{
6472 .start = . ;
6473 @dots{}
6474 .end = . ;
6475 @}
6476 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6477 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6478@dots{} @}
6479@end group
6480@end smallexample
6481
6482@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6483@itemx sizeof_headers
6484@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6485@cindex header size
6486Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6487information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6488this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6489choose, to facilitate paging.
6490
6491@cindex not enough room for program headers
6492@cindex program headers, not enough room
6493When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6494@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6495number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6496addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6497additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6498room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6499the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6500script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6501you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6502command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6503@end table
6504
6505@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6506@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6507@cindex implicit linker scripts
6508If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6509an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6510linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6511linker will report an error.
6512
6513An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6514
6515Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6516assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6517commands.
6518
6519Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6520at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6521read. This can affect archive searching.
6522
6523@ifset GENERIC
6524@node Machine Dependent
6525@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6526
6527@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6528@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6529sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6530functionality are not listed.
6531
6532@menu
36f63dca
NC
6533@ifset H8300
6534* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6535@end ifset
6536@ifset I960
6537* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6538@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6539@ifset M68HC11
6540* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6541@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6542@ifset ARM
6543* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6544@end ifset
6545@ifset HPPA
6546* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6547@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6548@ifset M68K
6549* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6550@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6551@ifset MIPS
6552* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6553@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6554@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6555* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6556@end ifset
2469cfa2 6557@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6558* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6559@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6560@ifset NDS32
6561* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6562@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6563@ifset NIOSII
6564* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6565@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6566@ifset POWERPC
6567* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6568@end ifset
6569@ifset POWERPC64
6570* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6571@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6572@ifset S/390
6573* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6574@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6575@ifset SPU
6576* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6577@end ifset
74459f0e 6578@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6579* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6580@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6581@ifset WIN32
6582* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6583@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6584@ifset XTENSA
6585* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6586@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6587@end menu
6588@end ifset
6589
252b5132
RH
6590@ifset H8300
6591@ifclear GENERIC
6592@raisesections
6593@end ifclear
6594
6595@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6596@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6597
6598@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6599For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6600you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6601
6602@table @emph
6603@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6604@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6605@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6606targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6607program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6608respectively.
6609
6610@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6611@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6612@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6613@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6614sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6615page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6616(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6617@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6618top page of memory).
1502569c 6619
81f5558e
NC
6620@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6621indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6622displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6623the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6624@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6625whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6626range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6627
1502569c 6628@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6629@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6630biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6631which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6632page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6633(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6634@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6635the top page of memory).
6636
6637@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6638@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
663932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6640changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6641(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6642@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6643the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6644@end table
6645
6646@ifclear GENERIC
6647@lowersections
6648@end ifclear
6649@end ifset
6650
36f63dca 6651@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6652@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6653@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6654@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6655@node Renesas
6656@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6657
c2dcd04e
NC
6658@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6659H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6660options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6661@end ifset
6662@end ifclear
6663
6664@ifset I960
6665@ifclear GENERIC
6666@raisesections
6667@end ifclear
6668
6669@node i960
6670@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6671
6672@cindex i960 support
6673
6674You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6675specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6676family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6677incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6678linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6679libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6680search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6681
6682For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6683well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6684paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6685the names
6686
6687@smallexample
6688@group
6689try
6690libtry.a
6691tryca
6692libtryca.a
6693@end group
6694@end smallexample
6695
6696@noindent
6697The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6698two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6699
6700You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6701the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6702use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6703specifies a library.
6704
6705@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6706@cindex relaxing on i960
6707@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6708you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6709@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6710them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6711instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6712instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6713target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6714not itself call any subroutines).
6715
6716@ifclear GENERIC
6717@lowersections
6718@end ifclear
6719@end ifset
6720
6721@ifset ARM
6722@ifclear GENERIC
6723@raisesections
6724@end ifclear
6725
93fd0973
SC
6726@ifset M68HC11
6727@ifclear GENERIC
6728@raisesections
6729@end ifclear
6730
6731@node M68HC11/68HC12
6732@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6733
6734@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6735
6736@subsection Linker Relaxation
6737
6738For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6739optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6740
6741@table @emph
6742@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6743@item relaxing address modes
6744@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6745targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6746program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6747respectively.
6748
6749@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6750transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6751page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6752
6753@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6754When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6755of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6756addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6757@code{bset} instructions.
6758
6759@end table
6760
6761@subsection Trampoline Generation
6762
6763@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6764@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6765For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6766call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6767will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6768trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6769case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6770point to the function trampoline.
6771
6772@ifclear GENERIC
6773@lowersections
6774@end ifclear
6775@end ifset
6776
36f63dca 6777@node ARM
3674e28a 6778@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6779
6780@cindex ARM interworking support
6781@kindex --support-old-code
6782For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6783between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6784been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6785line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6786libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6787option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6788given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6789which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6790the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6791non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6792
6793@cindex thumb entry point
6794@cindex entry point, thumb
6795@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6796The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6797@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6798But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6799branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6800executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6801
ce11ba6c
KT
6802@cindex PE import table prefixing
6803@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6804The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6805the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6806element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6807import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6808
e489d0ae
PB
6809@cindex BE8
6810@kindex --be8
6811The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6812executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6813objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6814option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6815little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6816
3674e28a
PB
6817@cindex TARGET1
6818@kindex --target1-rel
6819@kindex --target1-abs
6820The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6821@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6822or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6823and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6824
6825@cindex TARGET2
6826@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6827The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6828@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6829meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6830@table @samp
6831@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6832@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6833@item abs
6834@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6835@item got-rel
6836@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6837@end table
6838
319850b4
JB
6839@cindex FIX_V4BX
6840@kindex --fix-v4bx
6841The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6842specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6843interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6844also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6845
6846In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6847linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6848@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6849
6850In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6851relocations are ignored.
6852
845b51d6
PB
6853@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6854@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6855Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6856relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6857
6858@smallexample
6859TST rM, #1
6860MOVEQ PC, rM
6861BX Rn
6862@end smallexample
6863
6864This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6865and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6866condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6867
33bfe774
JB
6868@cindex USE_BLX
6869@kindex --use-blx
6870The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6871BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6872situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6873code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6874each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6875
6876This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6877specify it if you are using that target.
6878
c6dd86c6
JB
6879@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6880@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6881The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6882bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6883instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6884to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6885the support code can read the intended values.
6886
6887The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6888intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6889and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6890intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6891full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6892you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6893
6894If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6895enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6896@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6897mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6898vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6899@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6900
6901If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6902potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6903such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6904first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6905instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6906the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6907are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6908
2de70689
MGD
6909@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6910@kindex --fix-arm1176
6911@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6912The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6913in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6914are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6915unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6916
9d5777a3 6917Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6918Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6919http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6920
a504d23a
LA
6921@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6922@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6923
6924The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6925workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6926the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6927off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6928the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6929core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6930integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6931VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6932
6933The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6934necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6935
6936The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6937@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6938STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6939linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6940@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6941
6942If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6943potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6944such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6945replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6946branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6947then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6948
6949The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6950the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6951
6952The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6953they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6954there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6955occurs.
6956
6957The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6958PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6959large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6960cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6961occurs.
6962
bf21ed78
MS
6963@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6964@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6965The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6966warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6967enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6968linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6969using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6970not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6971
6972@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6973@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6974The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6975warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6976@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6977linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6978using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6979
726150b7
NC
6980@cindex PIC_VENEER
6981@kindex --pic-veneer
6982The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6983ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6984is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6985@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6986
6987@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6988@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6989The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6990code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6991perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6992placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6993controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6994The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6995duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6996group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6997code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6998where they should be placed.
6999
7000The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7001@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7002placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7003branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7004placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7005value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7006exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7007A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7008linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7009from the input sections.
7010
7011The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7012@samp{N = +1}.
7013
1a51c1a4
NC
7014Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7015only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7016otherwise.
7017
1db37fe6
YG
7018@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7019@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7020@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7021The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7022
7023The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7024
68fcca92
JW
7025@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7026@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7027@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7028The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7029
7030Please contact ARM for further details.
7031
1db37fe6
YG
7032@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7033@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7034@cindex Merging exidx entries
7035The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7036
7037@kindex --long-plt
7038@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7039The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7040which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7041entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7042
1f56df9d
JW
7043@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7044@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7045The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7046link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7047
4ba2ef8f
TP
7048@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7049All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7050Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7051@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7052veneers in memory.
7053
54ddd295
TP
7054@kindex --cmse-implib
7055@cindex Secure gateway import library
7056The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7057specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7058secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7059executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7060
0955507f
TP
7061@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7062@cindex Input import library
7063The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7064must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7065given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7066in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7067@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7068library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7069library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7070for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7071specified.
7072
36f63dca
NC
7073@ifclear GENERIC
7074@lowersections
7075@end ifclear
7076@end ifset
7077
7078@ifset HPPA
7079@ifclear GENERIC
7080@raisesections
7081@end ifclear
7082
7083@node HPPA ELF32
7084@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7085@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7086@kindex --multi-subspace
7087When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7088import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7089The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7090stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7091multiple sub-spaces.
7092
7093@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7094@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7095Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7096stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7097@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7098sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7099a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7100the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7101conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7102prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7103A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7104branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7105@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7106@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7107detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7108positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7109
7110Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7111single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7112create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7113large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7114
7115@ifclear GENERIC
7116@lowersections
7117@end ifclear
7118@end ifset
7119
7fb9f789
NC
7120@ifset M68K
7121@ifclear GENERIC
7122@raisesections
7123@end ifclear
7124
7125@node M68K
7126@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7127
7128@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7129@kindex --got=@var{type}
7130The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7131The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7132@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7133the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7134@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7135entries only at non-negative offsets.
7136@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7137entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7138support such GOTs.
7139@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7140output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7141file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7142files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7143
7144@ifclear GENERIC
7145@lowersections
7146@end ifclear
7147@end ifset
7148
833794fc
MR
7149@ifset MIPS
7150@ifclear GENERIC
7151@raisesections
7152@end ifclear
7153
7154@node MIPS
7155@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7156
7157@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7158@kindex --insn32
7159@kindex --no-insn32
7160The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7161microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7162in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7163used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7164or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7165including 16-bit ones where possible.
7166
8b10b0b3
MR
7167@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7168@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7169@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7170The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7171control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7172@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7173relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7174calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7175relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7176instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7177or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7178the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7179
833794fc
MR
7180@ifclear GENERIC
7181@lowersections
7182@end ifclear
7183@end ifset
7184
36f63dca
NC
7185@ifset MMIX
7186@ifclear GENERIC
7187@raisesections
7188@end ifclear
7189
7190@node MMIX
7191@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7192For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7193@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7194understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7195can translate between the two formats.
7196
7197There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7198Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7199registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7200equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7201@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7202global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7203this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7204symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7205
7a2de473
HPN
7206Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7207@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7208The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7209of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7210
7211Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7212are left out from an mmo file.
7213
7214@ifclear GENERIC
7215@lowersections
7216@end ifclear
7217@end ifset
7218
7219@ifset MSP430
7220@ifclear GENERIC
7221@raisesections
7222@end ifclear
7223
7224@node MSP430
7225@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7226For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7227will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7228just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7229
7230@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7231The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7232
7233@table @code
7234@item @samp{.vectors}
7235Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7236
7237@item @samp{.bootloader}
7238Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7239in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7240
7241@item @samp{.infomem}
7242Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7243this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7244
c0065db7 7245@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7246This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7247in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7248
7249@item @samp{.noinit}
7250Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7251
c0065db7 7252The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7253@end table
7254
7255@ifclear GENERIC
7256@lowersections
7257@end ifclear
7258@end ifset
7259
35c08157
KLC
7260@ifset NDS32
7261@ifclear GENERIC
7262@raisesections
7263@end ifclear
7264
7265@node NDS32
7266@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7267@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7268For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7269relaxes objects according to these options.
7270
7271@table @code
7272@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7273Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7274
7275@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7276Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7277
7278@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7279Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7280
7281@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7282Export the EX9 table after linking.
7283
7284@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7285Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7286
7287@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7288Update the existing EX9 table.
7289
7290@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7291Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7292
7293@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7294Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7295
7296@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7297Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7298
7299@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7300Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7301@end table
7302
7303@ifclear GENERIC
7304@lowersections
7305@end ifclear
7306@end ifset
7307
78058a5e
SL
7308@ifset NIOSII
7309@ifclear GENERIC
7310@raisesections
7311@end ifclear
7312
7313@node Nios II
7314@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7315@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7316@kindex --relax on Nios II
7317
7318Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7319transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7320which may result in @command{ld} giving
7321@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7322The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7323trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7324outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7325trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7326be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7327larger than 256MB.
7328
7329The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7330is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7331@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7332locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7333source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7334register as a temporary.
7335
7336Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7337relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7338option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7339
7340@ifclear GENERIC
7341@lowersections
7342@end ifclear
7343@end ifset
7344
2a60a7a8
AM
7345@ifset POWERPC
7346@ifclear GENERIC
7347@raisesections
7348@end ifclear
7349
7350@node PowerPC ELF32
7351@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7352@cindex PowerPC long branches
7353@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7354Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7355displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7356@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7357@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7358the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7359section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7360section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7361@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7362both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7363considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7364
7365@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7366@table @option
7367@cindex PowerPC PLT
7368@kindex --bss-plt
7369@item --bss-plt
7370Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7371generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7372the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7373writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7374@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7375PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7376compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7377BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7378
016687f8
AM
7379@kindex --secure-plt
7380@item --secure-plt
7381@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7382@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7383when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7384layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7385style BSS PLT.
7386
2a60a7a8
AM
7387@cindex PowerPC GOT
7388@kindex --sdata-got
7389@item --sdata-got
7390The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7391sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7392@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7393section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7394@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7395@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7396@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7397@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7398PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7399pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7400GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7401really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7402
7403@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7404@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7405@item --emit-stub-syms
7406This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7407symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7408
7409@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7410@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7411@item --no-tls-optimize
7412PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7413sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7414disable the optimization.
7415@end table
7416
7417@ifclear GENERIC
7418@lowersections
7419@end ifclear
7420@end ifset
7421
7422@ifset POWERPC64
7423@ifclear GENERIC
7424@raisesections
7425@end ifclear
7426
7427@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7428@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7429
7430@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7431@table @option
7432@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7433@kindex --stub-group-size
7434@item --stub-group-size
7435Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7436by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7437@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7438sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7439a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7440the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7441conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7442prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7443A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7444branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7445@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7446@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7447detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7448positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7449
7450Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7451single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7452create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7453large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7454
7455@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7456@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7457@item --emit-stub-syms
7458This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7459symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7460
7461@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7462@kindex --dotsyms
7463@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7464@item --dotsyms
7465@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7466These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7467in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7468function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7469code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7470properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7471to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7472@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7473dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7474feature.
7475
7ae4ea7d
AM
7476@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7477@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7478@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7479@item --save-restore-funcs
7480@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7481These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7482provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7483@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7484function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7485link.
7486
2a60a7a8
AM
7487@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7488@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7489@item --no-tls-optimize
7490PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7491sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7492disable the optimization.
7493
7c9cf415
AM
7494@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7495@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7496@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7497@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7498@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7499These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7500stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7501an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7502@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7503stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7504option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7505Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7506slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7507application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7508normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7509
2a60a7a8
AM
7510@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7511@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7512@item --no-opd-optimize
7513PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7514corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7515the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7516Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7517
7518@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7519@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7520@item --non-overlapping-opd
7521Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7522@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7523the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7524entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7525
7526@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7527@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7528@item --no-toc-optimize
7529PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7530entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7531reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7532marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7533marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7534relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7535unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7536reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7537discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7538reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7539code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7540optimization.
7541
7542@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7543@kindex --no-multi-toc
7544@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7545If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7546@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7547where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7548entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7549total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7550grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7551TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7552calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7553help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
755464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7555Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7556
7557@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7558@kindex --no-toc-sort
7559@item --no-toc-sort
7560By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7561happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7562placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7563with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7564referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7565@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7566results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7567off this feature.
7568
7569@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7570@kindex --plt-align
7571@kindex --no-plt-align
7572@item --plt-align
7573@itemx --no-plt-align
7574Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7575padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7576specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7577that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7578stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7579
7580@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7581@kindex --plt-static-chain
7582@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7583@item --plt-static-chain
7584@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7585Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7586chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7587chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7588
7589@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7590@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7591@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7592@item --plt-thread-safe
7593@itemx --no-thread-safe
7594With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7595lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7596another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7597order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7598memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7599barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7600looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7601seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7602default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7603@end table
7604
7605@ifclear GENERIC
7606@lowersections
7607@end ifclear
7608@end ifset
7609
b4cbbe8f
AK
7610@ifset S/390
7611@ifclear GENERIC
7612@raisesections
7613@end ifclear
7614
7615@node S/390 ELF
7616@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7617
7618@cindex S/390 ELF options
7619@table @option
7620
7621@cindex S/390
7622@kindex --s390-pgste
7623@item --s390-pgste
7624This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7625segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7626binaries marked that way.
7627@end table
7628
7629@ifclear GENERIC
7630@lowersections
7631@end ifclear
7632@end ifset
7633
49fa1e15
AM
7634@ifset SPU
7635@ifclear GENERIC
7636@raisesections
7637@end ifclear
7638
7639@node SPU ELF
7640@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7641
7642@cindex SPU ELF options
7643@table @option
7644
7645@cindex SPU plugins
7646@kindex --plugin
7647@item --plugin
7648This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7649
7650@cindex SPU overlays
7651@kindex --no-overlays
7652@item --no-overlays
7653Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7654regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7655@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7656turns off all this special overlay handling.
7657
7658@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7659@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7660@item --emit-stub-syms
7661This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7662symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7663
7664@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7665@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7666@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7667This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7668function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7669on calls to non-overlay regions.
7670
7671@cindex SPU local store size
7672@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7673@item --local-store=lo:hi
7674@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7675the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7676range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7677
c0065db7 7678@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7679@kindex --stack-analysis
7680@item --stack-analysis
7681SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7682unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7683under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7684@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7685@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7686determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7687for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7688for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7689for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7690find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7691and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7692under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7693dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7694is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7695and calls will be given.
7696
c0065db7 7697@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7698@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7699@item --emit-stack-syms
7700This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7701in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7702These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7703functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7704functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7705such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7706The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7707@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7708@end table
7709
7710@ifclear GENERIC
7711@lowersections
7712@end ifclear
7713@end ifset
7714
36f63dca
NC
7715@ifset TICOFF
7716@ifclear GENERIC
7717@raisesections
7718@end ifclear
7719
7720@node TI COFF
7721@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7722@cindex TI COFF versions
7723@kindex --format=@var{version}
7724The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7725TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7726also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7727format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7728header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7729
7730@ifclear GENERIC
7731@lowersections
7732@end ifclear
7733@end ifset
7734
2ca22b03
NC
7735@ifset WIN32
7736@ifclear GENERIC
7737@raisesections
7738@end ifclear
7739
7740@node WIN32
7741@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7742
c0065db7 7743This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7744See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7745command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7746
7747@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7748@cindex import libraries
7749@item import libraries
69da35b5 7750The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7751libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7752regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7753archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7754support for creating such libraries provided with the
7755@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7756
c0065db7
RM
7757@item exporting DLL symbols
7758@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7759The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7760
7761@table @emph
7762@item using auto-export functionality
7763@cindex using auto-export functionality
7764By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7765which is controlled by the following command line options:
7766
0a5d968e
NC
7767@itemize
7768@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7769@item --exclude-symbols
7770@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7771@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7772@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7773@end itemize
7774
09e2aba4
DK
7775When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7776(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7777symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7778often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7779private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7780options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7781exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7782final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7783
7784If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7785command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7786if either of the following are true:
7787
7788@itemize
7789@item A DEF file is used.
7790@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7791@end itemize
dc8465bf 7792
c0065db7
RM
7793@item using a DEF file
7794@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7795Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7796an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7797exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7798name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7799command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7800
7801@example
7802gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7803@end example
7804
0a5d968e
NC
7805Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7806@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7807
dc8465bf
NC
7808Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7809
7810@example
4b5bd4e7 7811LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7812
7813EXPORTS
7814foo
7815bar
7816_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7817another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7818var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7819doo = foo == foo2
7820eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7821@end example
dc8465bf 7822
7fcab871 7823This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7824symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7825alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7826by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7827@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7828@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7829export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7830in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7831symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7832
6b31ad16
DS
7833The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7834name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7835the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7836
b45619c0
NC
7837When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7838library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7839@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7840executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7841
7842With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7843specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7844non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7845
7846If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7847or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7848filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7849
4b5bd4e7
DS
7850The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7851
7852@example
7853EXPORTS
7854 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7855 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7856 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7857@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7858
7859Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7860@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7861@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7862@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7863Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7864@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7865string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7866
7867The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7868
7869@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7870will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7871by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7872linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7873library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7874
7875@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7876The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7877the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7878@code{*_imp__foo}).
7879
7880@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7881well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7882read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7883variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7884the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7885extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7886application will behave unexpectedly.
7887
7888@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7889it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7890symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7891API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7892the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7893
4b5bd4e7
DS
7894See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7895other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7896
7897@cindex creating a DEF file
7898While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7899with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7900
7901@item Using decorations
7902@cindex Using decorations
7903Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7904itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7905declared as:
7906
7907@example
7908__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7909__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7910@end example
7911
7912All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7913any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7914this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7915the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7916
7917Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7918decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7919instead:
7920
7921@example
7922__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7923__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7924@end example
7925
c0065db7
RM
7926This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7927when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7928variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7929code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7930of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7931omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7932@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7933information.
c0065db7 7934@end table
dc8465bf 7935
2ca22b03
NC
7936@cindex automatic data imports
7937@item automatic data imports
7938The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7939by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7940compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7941issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7942code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7943c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7944initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7945decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7946platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7947command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7948The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7949suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7950trigger the feature's use.
7951
c0065db7 7952auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7953additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7954
c0065db7 7955"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7956documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7957
c0065db7
RM
7958The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7959occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7960One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7961below.
7962
7963@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7964For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7965object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7966offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7967field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7968in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7969without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7970The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7971references.
7972
c0065db7
RM
7973The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7974be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7975themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7976runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7977compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7978support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7979run without error on an older system.
7980
c0065db7
RM
7981@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7982enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7983
7984@cindex direct linking to a dll
7985@item direct linking to a dll
7986The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7987including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7988libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7989traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7990libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7991function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7992though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7993storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7994tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7995large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7996
c0065db7 7997Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7998@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7999of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8000perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8001select the dll instead of an import library.
8002
2ca22b03 8003
69da35b5
NC
8004For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8005to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8006
8007@example
45e948fe
NC
8008libxxx.dll.a
8009xxx.dll.a
8010libxxx.a
8011xxx.lib
69da35b5 8012cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8013libxxx.dll
8014xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8015@end example
8016
69da35b5
NC
8017before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8018
c0065db7
RM
8019(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8020where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8021@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8022file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8023@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8024
c0065db7
RM
8025Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8026@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8027was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8028various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8029could coexist on the same machine.
8030
2ca22b03
NC
8031The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8032applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8033libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8034
8035@example
8036bin/
8037 cygxxx.dll
8038lib/
8039 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8040 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8041@end example
8042
c0065db7
RM
8043Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8044done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8045
80461. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8047@example
8048gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8049@end example
2ca22b03 8050
69da35b5
NC
8051However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8052(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8053@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8054not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8055
2ca22b03
NC
80562. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8057directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8058should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8059making the app/dll.
8060
8061@example
8062ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8063@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8064
8065Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8066
8067@example
8068gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8069@end example
69da35b5
NC
8070
8071This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8072perfectly legal
8073
8074@example
8075bin/
8076 cygxxx-5.dll
8077lib/
c0065db7 8078 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8079@end example
8080
dc8465bf 8081Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8082even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8083@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8084
8085Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8086wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8087
80881. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8089work with auto-imported data.
8090
dc8465bf
NC
80912. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8092import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8093symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8094for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8095possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8096
45e948fe
NC
80973. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8098critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8099in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8100stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8101
69da35b5 8102So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8103true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8104a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8105binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8106massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8107requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8108will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8109
c0065db7 8110@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8111@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8112@item adding additional names
8113Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8114A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8115exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8116when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8117import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8118
c0065db7 8119@example
dc8465bf
NC
8120LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8121
8122EXPORTS
c0065db7 8123foo
dc8465bf 8124_foo = foo
c0065db7 8125@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8126
8127The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8128
8129Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8130source code using the "weak" attribute:
8131
c0065db7
RM
8132@example
8133void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8134void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8135@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8136
8137See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8138symbols.
8139
8140@item renaming symbols
8141Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8142kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8143@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8144DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8145created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8146
c0065db7 8147@example
dc8465bf
NC
8148LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8149
8150EXPORTS
8151_foo = foo
c0065db7 8152@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8153
8154The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8155@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8156@end table
dc8465bf 8157
0a5d968e 8158Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8159unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8160If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8161@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8162that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8163@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8164renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8165to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8166the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8167In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8168which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8169
8170@cindex weak externals
8171@item weak externals
8172The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8173weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8174defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8175are three variants of weak externals:
8176@itemize
8177@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8178called lazy externals.
8179@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8180This form is not presently implemented.
8181@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8182implemented.
8183@end itemize
8184As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8185are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8186uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8187
8188@cindex aligned common symbols
8189@item aligned common symbols
8190As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8191desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8192the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8193carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8194by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8195tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8196but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8197warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8198
2ca22b03
NC
8199@end table
8200
8201@ifclear GENERIC
8202@lowersections
8203@end ifclear
8204@end ifset
8205
e0001a05
NC
8206@ifset XTENSA
8207@ifclear GENERIC
8208@raisesections
8209@end ifclear
8210
8211@node Xtensa
8212@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8213
8214@cindex Xtensa processors
8215The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8216@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8217specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8218keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8219example, with the command:
8220
8221@smallexample
8222SECTIONS
8223@{
8224 .text : @{
8225 *(.literal .text)
8226 @}
8227@}
8228@end smallexample
8229
8230@noindent
8231@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8232and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8233literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8234interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8235group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8236files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8237and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8238
43cd72b9 8239@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8240@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8241Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8242provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8243is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8244literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8245will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8246location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8247the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8248unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8249@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8250range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8251
8252For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8253to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8254instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8255instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8256instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8257@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8258hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8259By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8260switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8261density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8262instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8263performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8264linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8265a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8266
8267The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8268control the linker:
8269
8270@cindex Xtensa options
8271@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8272@item --size-opt
8273When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8274more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8275no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8276alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8277preserve the correctness of the code.
8278@end table
e0001a05
NC
8279
8280@ifclear GENERIC
8281@lowersections
8282@end ifclear
8283@end ifset
8284
252b5132
RH
8285@ifclear SingleFormat
8286@node BFD
8287@chapter BFD
8288
8289@cindex back end
8290@cindex object file management
8291@cindex object formats available
8292@kindex objdump -i
8293The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8294These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8295object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8296format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8297it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8298associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8299object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8300(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8301list all the formats available for your configuration.
8302
8303@cindex BFD requirements
8304@cindex requirements for BFD
8305As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8306several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8307BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8308formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8309been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8310BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8311may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8312
8313One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8314mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8315useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8316conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8317
8318@menu
8319* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8320@end menu
8321
8322@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8323@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8324@cindex opening object files
8325@include bfdsumm.texi
8326@end ifclear
8327
8328@node Reporting Bugs
8329@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8330@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8331@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8332
ff5dcc92 8333Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8334
8335Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8336it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8337to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8338work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8339@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8340
8341In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8342information that enables us to fix the bug.
8343
8344@menu
8345* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8346* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8347@end menu
8348
8349@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8350@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8351@cindex bug criteria
8352
8353If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8354
8355@itemize @bullet
8356@cindex fatal signal
8357@cindex linker crash
8358@cindex crash of linker
8359@item
8360If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8361@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8362
8363@cindex error on valid input
8364@item
ff5dcc92 8365If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8366
8367@cindex invalid input
8368@item
ff5dcc92 8369If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8370may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8371object files are correct.
8372
8373@item
8374If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8375improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8376@end itemize
8377
8378@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8379@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8380@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8381@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8382
8383A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8384products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8385recommend you contact that organization first.
8386
8387You can find contact information for many support companies and
8388individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8389distribution.
8390
ad22bfe8 8391@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8392Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8393@value{BUGURL}.
8394@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8395
8396The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8397@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8398fact or leave it out, state it!
8399
8400Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8401problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8402assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8403matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8404the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8405location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8406were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8407into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8408specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8409and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8410
8411Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8412the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8413on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8414
8415Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8416bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8417respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8418You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8419
8420To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8421
8422@itemize @bullet
8423@item
ff5dcc92 8424The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8425the @samp{--version} argument.
8426
8427Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8428the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8429
8430@item
ff5dcc92 8431Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8432patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8433
8434@item
8435The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8436version number.
8437
8438@item
ff5dcc92 8439What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8440``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8441
8442@item
8443The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8444observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8445list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8446sufficient.
8447
8448If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8449and then we might not encounter the bug.
8450
8451@item
8452A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8453bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8454provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8455bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8456state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8457requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8458we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8459attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8460
8461If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8462@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8463object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8464@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8465how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8466
8467@item
8468A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8469incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8470
ff5dcc92 8471Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8472will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8473not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8474a chance to make a mistake.
8475
8476Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8477say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8478copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8479C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8480and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8481fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8482you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8483any conclusion from our observations.
8484
8485@item
ff5dcc92 8486If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8487diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8488@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8489If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8490context, not by line number.
8491
8492The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8493sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8494@end itemize
8495
8496Here are some things that are not necessary:
8497
8498@itemize @bullet
8499@item
8500A description of the envelope of the bug.
8501
8502Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8503which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8504changes will not affect it.
8505
8506This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8507will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8508with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8509We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8510
8511Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8512of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8513output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8514less time, and so on.
8515
8516However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8517report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8518
8519@item
8520A patch for the bug.
8521
8522A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8523the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8524a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8525to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8526
ff5dcc92 8527Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8528construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8529through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8530able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8531fixed.
8532
8533And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8534patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8535help us to understand.
8536
8537@item
8538A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8539
8540Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8541things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8542@end itemize
8543
8544@node MRI
8545@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8546@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8547To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8548linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8549alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8550described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8551simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8552@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8553linker commands; these commands are described here.
8554
8555In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8556file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8557features to make use of them.
8558
8559You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8560@samp{-c} command-line option.
8561
8562Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8563command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8564blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8565MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8566issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8567
8568Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8569
8570You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8571lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8572The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8573
8574@table @code
8575@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8576@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8577@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8578Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8579the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8580@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8581your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8582script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8583commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8584input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8585@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8586
8587@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8588@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8589Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8590in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8591
8592@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8593
8594@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8595@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8596Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8597@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8598
8599@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8600@item BASE @var{expression}
8601Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8602absolute addresses) in the output file.
8603
8604@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8605@item CHIP @var{expression}
8606@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8607This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8608
8609@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8610@item END
8611This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8612
8613@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8614@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8615Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8616language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8617
8618@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8619@item
252b5132
RH
8620S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8621
8622@item
8623IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8624
8625@item
8626COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8627@samp{COFF}
8628@end enumerate
8629
8630@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8631@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8632Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8633@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8634
8635The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8636same line, with no change in its effect.
8637
8638@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8639@item LOAD @var{filename}
8640@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8641Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8642same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8643command line.
8644
8645@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8646@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8647@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8648MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8649option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8650
8651@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8652@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8653@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8654Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8655order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8656script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8657sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8658file, in the order specified.
8659
8660@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8661@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8662@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8663@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8664Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8665@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8666
8667@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8668@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8669@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8670@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8671You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8672specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8673If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8674@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8675@end table
8676
793c5807
NC
8677@node GNU Free Documentation License
8678@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8679@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8680
370b66a1
CD
8681@node LD Index
8682@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8683
8684@printindex cp
8685
8686@tex
7ca01ed9 8687% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8688% meantime:
8689\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8690\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8691\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8692\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8693\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8694\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8695\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8696\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8697\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8698% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8699@end tex
8700
252b5132 8701@bye